JP2018191853A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an amusement by performing a performance having a higher video visual effect.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: projection means capable of projecting a video light; a columnar movable projected member comprising plural projection areas in a circumferential direction to which the video is projected by the video light projected from the projection means; and movable projected member drive means capable of rotating the movable projected member in a circumferential direction and stopping the same. The movable projected member drive means comprises stop means for stopping the movable projected member so that the video is projected on any one projection area out of the plural projection areas, and rotation means for rotating the movable projected member in the circumferential direction in a mode in which both of the video projected to one projection area and a video projected to another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a game (such as a medal) is paid out, and a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  By the way, a gaming machine including a projector that projects image light forward is proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the image light projected from the projector is reflected to the back side of the gaming machine body, and the first projection member and the second object to be projected on which the reflected image light is projected. A projection member. Then, image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface of the first projection member, and image light representing a three-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface of the second projection member. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that allows the image to feel a three-dimensional effect and depth.

JP, 2006-187444, A

  However, in recent years, by making effective use of the functions unique to gaming machines in which video is projected by the video light projected from the projector, it is possible to produce a higher visual effect than before, There is a demand to enhance interest.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest by performing an effect with a higher video visual effect.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a driving mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area are provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction is multifaceted using an outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees. By switching a part of the projection plane on which the video is projected (projection plane portion excluding the lower screen 7082), the video projected on one projection area (for example, the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712) and the other An effect can be realized in which both the projected image (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. . Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. .

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection areas, there are three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). A triangular prism shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has a polygonal column shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, Projection irrelevant projection between one projection area and another projection area when the projection area on which the image is projected is changed from one projection area to another projection area by the image light projected from the projector 213) It may be necessary to go through an area. In this regard, the movable projection member has three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular prism shape, the movable projection member is simply rotated about 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and immediately from one projection area to another projection area without passing through an unrelated projection area. It becomes possible to change to.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a perspective view of a display device in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the projection block in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the projection block in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the block to be projected in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the projection member moving mechanism in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a to-be-projected block when a trapezoid member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state of a to-be-projected block when a pseudo reel member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a to-be-projected block when making a pseudo reel member into the projection object of image light in the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the state of a to-be-projected block when a plane screen member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a to-be-projected block when a plane screen member is made into the projection object of image light in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of the effect registration task performed by sub CPU. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a method for creating image data (PJ-compatible image data) of image light projected on various projection members in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the production | generation method of the PJ corresponding | compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging | photography method in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of virtual projection image data generated by a virtual projection operation in an embodiment of the present invention. In one Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows the process outline | summary at the time of producing | generating PJ corresponding | compatible image data from virtual picked-up image data. FIG. 6 is a diagram for describing an outline of generation of PJ-compatible image data when a movable projection member is included in a projection target member in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the image data generation process performed in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the production | generation method of the PJ corresponding | compatible image data in the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the production | generation method of the PJ corresponding | compatible image data in the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the projection matrix and offset matrix which are used in the production | generation process of PJ corresponding | compatible image data in the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the production | generation method of the PJ corresponding | compatible image data by the texture mapping method in the modification 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the image data generation process performed in the modification 3 of this invention. It is an external appearance perspective view of the display apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a to-be-projected block. It is a disassembled perspective view of the to-be-projected block shown by FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the to-be-projected block shown by FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the to-be-projected block shown by FIG. It is an external appearance perspective view of a movable screen unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable screen unit into the column body screen, the right base, the left base, and the rotation gear mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a column body screen. It is a disassembled perspective view of a column body screen. It is the perspective view of the column body screen seen from the direction which can visually recognize the aspect by which the male rib is clamped by the female rib. It is the side view which looked at the column body screen from the right side. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st screen member and the 2nd screen member. It is the sectional view on the AA line shown by FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st screen member and the 3rd screen member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right screen drive base and a drive mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side. It is sectional drawing which looked at the to-be-projected block from upper direction when it cut | disconnects in a horizontal direction so that a rotating shaft may be included. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side of the block to be projected from the front side. It is a figure which shows the state by which the rotation of a movable screen unit is not prevented by the stopper mechanism. It is a figure which shows the state in which rotation of the movable screen unit is prevented by the stopper mechanism. It is an enlarged view of the A section shown by FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable screen unit from the right side, Comprising: It is the figure shown so that an optical sensor unit could be visually recognized. It is the figure which arranged the front view and right side view of a to-be-projected block on either side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and right side view of a to-be-projected block on either side. It is the figure which arranged the front view and right view of a to-be-projected block on either side, and is a figure when the projection surface of a 2nd screen member has faced the front. (A) The figure which shows the example of an image projected on the projection surface of the 2nd screen member, (B) The figure which shows the example of an image projected on the projection surface of the 3rd screen member. It is a front view of the front panel of 2nd Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the front panel from the upper right side. It is a front view of a front effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a front effect unit. FIG. 58 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 57. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right light effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right light effect unit. It is a front view of a right light production unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a LED board, a light-guide plate cover, and a light-guide plate. It is CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the LED board and the right side light-guide plate subunit were assembled | attached. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the right light effect unit as seen from the direction of arrow 990 in FIG. 67. It is a front view of a left side light production unit. It is the DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a light guide plate, a light guide plate cover, and an LED board. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right side light effect unit when neither the right light-guide plate subunit nor the right side lens subunit is performing the light emission effect. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right side light effect unit when the light emission effect is performed about the right side light-guide plate subunit, and the light emission effect is not performed about the right side lens subunit. It is a figure which shows the aspect of the right light production | presentation unit when the light emission effect is not performed about the right light-guide plate subunit, and the light emission effect is performed about the right lens subunit.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot machine having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “out of” other than that. Such a thing is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi-slot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is determined for four symbols.

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination is set to the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (four symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the active line.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when the combination of the displayed symbols is determined to be related to winning by the winning determination means, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the series of gaming operations described above, various effects can be achieved by displaying images on a display device, outputting light from various lamps, outputting sound from a speaker, or a combination thereof. Is done.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for performance is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time by lottery from the plural types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2 (game machine main body). The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display columns) are provided in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (main reels) are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction).

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1.

  The front panel 10 is provided on the upper portion of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is constituted by a frame-like member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is disposed to face a display device 11 described later disposed inside the cabinet 2a.

  The display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the video (image) displayed on the display device 11 described later via the display device cover 30. In the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin, thereby suppressing the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11. Is clearly visible.

  A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21 a and 21 b provided on the upper portion of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (refer to an LED group 85 in FIG. 15 described later), and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

  The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in an LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal 13 includes a symbol display area 4 and various devices (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and the like to be operated by the player. 17R, a settlement button (not shown), and the like.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps with the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position closer to the player than the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. 3L, 3C, 3R has a size that enables visual recognition. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and is configured so that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel. Two symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, one symbol (three in total) is placed in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the reel display window 4, It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by an opening of a frame member 31 provided on the pedestal portion 13. A substantially horizontal plane base region is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, a medal slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and a MAX bet button 15a and a 1 bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

  The medal slot 14 is provided to accept a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a predetermined number (for example, three) set in advance, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number are deposited inside the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

  The MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided for determining the number of coins used for one game from medals deposited in the cabinet 2a. Note that a bet button LED (not shown) that is lit when a medal can be inserted is provided inside the MAX bet button 15a. The checkout button is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  When the player depresses the MAX bet button 15a, medals corresponding to the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed, one medal is inserted. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the active line is activated. Hereinafter, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1 bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 14 (operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are all referred to as “insertion operation”.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  In addition, an information display 6 is provided in the approximate center of the pedestal region on a substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

  The information display 6 has a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as “paid-out number”). (Hereinafter referred to as “7-segment LED”) and information such as the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “credit number”) for digital display (notification) to the player A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In this embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information about the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is switched from the display mode of the paid-out number to the display mode of the error type information.

  Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. The instruction monitor informs the player of necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the 2-digit 7-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. To do.

  Note that the aspect uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, in the case of informing the pressing order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)”. When the numerical value “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order “2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)” is notified, the numerical value “2” is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order In a case where “3rd (perform the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)” is notified, a numerical value “3” is displayed on the instruction monitor.

  As shown in FIG. 15 to be described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via a door relay terminal board 68 and a game operation display board 81. The display operation of the information display 6 is Control is performed by a later-described main control circuit 90 in the control board 71. Moreover, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, a configuration for notifying the stop operation information using other means controlled by the sub control board 72 is provided. Specifically, a stop operation is performed by a display device 11 described later including a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described later and a projection block 202 including various projection members (see FIG. 3 and FIGS. 5 to 8 described later). The information of is notified.

  When such a configuration is applied, the notification mode in the instruction monitor and the notification mode in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly (for example, the numerical value “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if is displayed, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player, which is not a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value “1” that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11) displays the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 having such a configuration, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on necessary stop operation corresponding to the internal winning combination. In addition, the presence / absence of notification of such stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state in which no navigation occurs (for example, a non-ART gaming state), information on the stopping operation is not notified, but information on a stopping operation is notified in a notification gaming state in which navigation occurs (for example, an ART gaming state). You may do it.

  Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially vertically from a pedestal region in a substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 13 in the front surface portion of the door body 9. The sub display device 18 includes a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various types of information.

  A touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 15 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates in accordance with a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when a player's operation is accepted, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function that allows the display of the sub display device 18 to be switched in accordance with the player's operation received via the touch sensor 19 (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19). Have The sub display device 18 is controlled by a later-described sub control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

  In the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout opening 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 51 described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. Sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effects are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the back side of the front door 2b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a includes a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. And the display apparatus 11 is arrange | positioned in the upper part in the cabinet 2a.

  The display device 11 includes a projection block 201 including a projector 213 described later and a projection block 202 including a plurality of types of projection members described below onto which video light emitted from the projector 213 described below is projected. The projection block 202 is also provided with a function (projection member moving mechanism 305 described later) for switching the projection member according to the gaming state.

  In the display device 11, image light corresponding to image data (PJ-compatible image data described later) generated by image composition processing in a virtual space described later is projected onto a predetermined projection member, and an image display effect or the like is performed. Is called. Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the shape of the projection target (object) to be projected and the positional relationship (projection distance, angle, etc.) between the projector 213 and the projection target described later. Then, the image light is projected onto the surface of the projection target member from a projector 213 described later. By providing such an effect function, an advanced and powerful effect can be performed. The specific configuration and operation of the display device 11 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

  In the lower part of the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device 51 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can store a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button is pressed and settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 15 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  Further, a sub control board case 57 that houses a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 15 described later) is disposed above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 has a sub control circuit 150 (see FIG. 18 described later) mounted thereon. The sub control circuit 150 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. The sub-control board 72 is a specific example of the control unit according to the present invention. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 150 will be described later.

  A sub-relay board 61 is disposed above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub control board 72 and a main control board 71 described later is mounted. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72, a board disposed around the sub-control board 72, various devices (units), and the like is mounted.

  Although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 15 described later) is disposed in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 15 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). Is a relay board on which wiring for connecting is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is disposed at the center of the rear side of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and main control is performed on the opposite side of the middle door 41 from the reel display window 4 side. A main control board case 55 in which a board 71 (see FIG. 15 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 16 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, determination of the presence or absence of winning. . In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 also performs control such as a lottery process for determining whether or not a notification game (such as ART) is determined, a process for displaying navigation information on an instruction monitor, and a process for transmitting various test signals. . The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

  Speakers 65L and 65R are disposed below the middle door 41 on the back side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are disposed at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed diagonally to the left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed in the area where the front door 2 b is opened and closed by the middle door 41 on the back surface and below the reel display window 4 (see below). 15). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub-relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 401 for a testing machine, This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 402 for the testing machine is mounted. Examples of the various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 15a, a 1 bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Configuration of display device>
Next, the configuration of the display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display device 11 includes a projection block 201 and a projection block 202 disposed below the projection block 201. The display device 11 generates image light by a projector 213 (described later) installed in the projection block 201, and the projection surface of a projection target member (such as a trapezoidal member 302 described later) provided on the projection block 202. Project to.

  In this specification, expressions such as “video projected (or projected) from the projector 213”, “projected video”, “projected image”, and “projected image” may be used. However, these all mean images projected (or made) onto the projection plane by the image light projected from the projector 213.

[Projection block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 201. FIG. 7 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection block 201. Note that a projection block 201 including a projector 213, which will be described later, is a specific example of a projection unit according to the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the projection block 201 includes a base member 211, a reflection member 212, and a projector 213. The base member 211 is formed of a hollow substantially box-like member having an open bottom surface, and includes an upper plate portion 221, a front plate portion 222, a rear plate portion 223, a left side plate portion 224, and a right side plate portion 225. Have.

  A projector 213 is attached to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 (surface on the projection block 202 side). Further, the front plate portion 222 is provided with a reflection member mounting portion 227, and the reflection member mounting portion 227 is configured by a protruding member that protrudes forward (player side) from the front plate portion 222.

  The front piece 234 of the reflection member mounting portion 227 is formed of a plate-like member, and the surface direction of the front piece 234 (projection surface of the reflection member mounting portion 227) is obliquely upward and the surface direction of the back surface is obliquely downward. It is inclined to become. A reflective member 212 is attached to the back surface of the front piece 234 (the surface on the projector 213 and projection block 202 side).

  As shown in FIG. 7, the reflecting member 212 has a mirror holder 236 that is substantially the same size (size) as the front piece 234 and has a rectangular surface, and is fixed to the mirror holder 236. Reflection mirror 237. The mirror holder 236 is fixed to the back surface of the front piece 234 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The reflection mirror 237 is fixed to the surface of the mirror holder 236 on the projector 213 and projection block 202 side. The reflecting mirror 237 is tilted so that the surface direction of the reflecting surface is obliquely downward, and the image light emitted from the projector 213 is directed toward a projection target member (a trapezoidal member 302 described later) of the projection target block 202. reflect.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the projector 213 includes a projector main body 241 and a mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is configured by a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, and the projector main body 241 is mounted on the back surface (surface on the projection block 202 side) of the mounting bracket 242. The mounting bracket 242 is fixed to the back surface of the upper plate portion 221 of the base member 211 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The projector main body 241 includes a case 251 (see FIG. 6), an illumination unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a plurality of heat sinks 255, and a plurality of fans 256. In FIG. 7, only one heat sink 255 and one fan 256 are shown.

  The case 251 is configured with a hollow housing. In the case 251, an illumination unit 252, a liquid crystal prism unit 253, a projection lens 254, a heat sink 255, and a fan 256 are housed. In addition, an opening that is blocked by the projection lens 254 is provided on the front surface of the case 251 (on the reflection member 212 side).

  In the case 251, a liquid crystal prism unit 253 is disposed behind the projection lens 254 (in the direction opposite to the mirror holder 236 side), and an illumination unit 252 is disposed behind the liquid crystal prism unit 253. A plurality of heat sinks 255 are disposed around the lighting unit 252, and the plurality of fans 256 are disposed adjacent to the plurality of heat sinks 255.

  The illumination unit 252 has a plurality of light sources, for example. The plurality of light sources includes a light source R (not shown) that emits red light, a light source G (not shown) that emits green light, and a light source B (not shown) that emits blue light. . Accordingly, light of three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is incident on the liquid crystal prism unit 253, respectively.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, As a light source, you may use one high-intensity discharge lamp, for example. In this case, a color separation mirror (dichroic mirror) is used to separate light emitted from the high-intensity discharge lamp into light of three colors, red (R), green (G), and blue (B).

  The liquid crystal prism unit 253 includes, for example, three liquid crystal panels and a color composition cross prism (dichroic prism). The three liquid crystal panels include a liquid crystal panel R (not shown) on which red light enters, a liquid crystal panel G (not shown) on which green light enters, and a liquid crystal panel B (not shown) on which blue light enters. Consists of. The cross prism combines the three video lights generated by the liquid crystal panels as one video light.

The projection lens 254 is disposed so as to face the reflection mirror 237 of the reflection member 212. Therefore, the image light emitted from the liquid crystal prism unit 253 passes through the projection lens 254 and enters the reflection mirror 237. The plurality of heat sinks 255 radiate heat generated by the lighting unit 252. Further, the plurality of fans 256 includes a plurality of heat sinks 2.
Air is blown to 55 to cool the plurality of heat sinks 255.

[Projected block]
Next, the configuration of the projection block 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 202. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the movement mechanism of the projection member provided in the projection block 202.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the projection block 202 includes a storage case 301, a trapezoidal member 302, a pseudo reel member 303, a flat screen member 304, and a projection member moving mechanism 305. Each of the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304 is a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention. The trapezoidal member 302 is a specific example of the first display unit according to the present invention, and each of the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 is one of the second display unit according to the present invention. A specific example is shown. Further, the projection member moving mechanism 305 is a specific example of the movable control means according to the present invention.

(1) Storage Case The storage case 301 is a hollow housing whose front and upper surfaces are opened, and includes a pedestal part 311, a back wall 312, a left side wall 313, and a right side wall 314. Each wall is composed of a plate-shaped member having a substantially rectangular surface, the pedestal 311 and the back wall 312 form the bottom and the back of the storage case 301, respectively, and the left wall 313 and the right wall 314 respectively A left side surface portion and a right side surface portion of the storage case 301 are formed.

(2) Trapezoidal member The trapezoidal member 302 is composed of a floor plate portion 321 having a trapezoidal surface and three wall plate portions 322, 323, and 324. It is fixed.

  The floor plate portion 321 is placed on the placement surface 311 a of the pedestal portion 311. Under the present circumstances, the floor board part 321 is mounted on the base part 311 so that the lower side (long side) part of the floor board part 321 may be located in the front (player side). In addition, the surface 321a (plane) on the opposite side to the surface which contact | abutted the mounting surface 311a of the base part 311 of the floor board part 321 becomes a projection surface. Video light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 321 a of the floor plate portion 321.

  The wall plate portion 322 is configured by a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular surface, and is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321. At this time, the wall plate portion 322 is continuously formed on the upper side portion of the floor plate portion 321 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 322 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. The plane on the front door 2b side (player side) of the wall plate 322 becomes the projection plane 322a. Similar to the projection surface 321 a of the floor plate portion 321, image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 322 a of the wall plate portion 322.

  The wall plate part 323 is composed of a plate-like member, and is formed continuously from the left side part of the floor plate part 321 and the left side part of the wall plate part 322. At this time, the wall plate portion 323 is continuous with the left side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the left side portion of the wall plate portion 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate portion 323 and the surface of the floor plate portion 321 is substantially vertical. Formed. And the plane by the side of the wall board part 324 of the wall board part 323 becomes the projection surface 323a. The angle between the projection surface 323a of the wall plate portion 323 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate portion 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle greater than 90 degrees), so the projection surface 323a opens the opening 10a of the front door 2b. Via the player. Similar to the projection surface 321 a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 323 a of the wall plate portion 323.

  The wall plate portion 324 is composed of a plate-like member and is formed continuously to the right side portion of the floor plate portion 321 and the right side portion of the wall plate portion 322. At this time, the wall plate 324 is continuous with the right side of the floor plate 321 and the right side of the wall plate 322 so that the angle between the surface of the wall plate 324 and the surface of the floor plate 321 is substantially vertical. Formed. And the plane by the side of the wall board part 324 of the wall board part 324 becomes the projection surface 324a. Since the angle between the projection surface 324a of the wall plate 324 and the projection surface 322a of the wall plate 322 is an obtuse angle (an angle greater than 90 degrees), the projection surface 324a opens the opening 10a of the front door 2b. Via the player. Similar to the projection surface 321a of the floor plate portion 321, the image light emitted from the projector 213 and then reflected by the reflecting member 212 is projected onto the projection surface 324a of the wall plate portion 324.

  In the present embodiment, image light is projected onto a partial area of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoidal member 302. The projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a have a projection area where the image light is projected and a non-projection area where the image light is not projected. Note that silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a. On the other hand, black paint is applied to the non-projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a.

  In this manner, by applying black paint to the non-projection areas of the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a, light reflection in the non-projection areas is suppressed, and irregular reflection of light in the cabinet 2a is suppressed. can do. Further, by applying a black paint to the non-projection area, it is possible to vibrate, rotate, collapse, change the shape, change the coloring, and partially emphasize the expression of the projection target member.

(3) Pseudo reel member As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the pseudo reel member 303 includes an arc plate portion 331 and a pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B (for the rotating arm 332B, see FIG. 11 described later). Is provided.

  The arc plate portion 331 is configured by a plate body that extends in an arc shape (a plate body whose side surface extends in an arc shape). Therefore, the circular arc plate portion 331 is formed with the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b. On the inner peripheral surface 331a of the arc plate portion 331, a decoration related to the model of the pachislot 1 is provided. On the other hand, the outer peripheral surface 331b is formed of a smooth curved surface and serves as a projection surface onto which video light emitted from the projector 213 is projected (see FIG. 11 described later). Further, silver (or gray) paint is applied to the inner peripheral surface 331a and the outer peripheral surface 331b of the arc plate portion 331.

  The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are respectively formed continuously on the pair of arcuate side portions of the arcuate plate portion 331, and the surface is formed of a substantially fan-shaped plate. The pair of rotating arms 332A and 332B are rotatably supported by support plates 351A and 351B (to be described later) of the projection member moving mechanism 305, respectively. The pseudo reel member 303 rotates between a standby position where the inner peripheral surface 331a faces forward (player side) and an exposed position where the outer peripheral surface 331b faces forward. The operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 described later.

(4) Plane Screen Member As shown in FIG. 8, the plane screen member 304 is composed of a plate-like member having a substantially rectangular surface, and includes a first plane 304a (lower surface in FIG. 8) and a second plane 304b (FIG. 8 is an upper surface). A silver (or gray) paint is applied to the first flat surface 304 a of the flat screen member 304. On the other hand, white paint is applied to the second plane 304b, and the second plane 304b serves as a projection surface for image light projected from the projector 213 via the reflecting member 212.

  The flat screen member 304 rotates between a standby position where the surface direction of the first flat surface 304a is obliquely downward and an exposed position where the surface direction of the second flat surface (projection surface) 304b is the front (player side). To do. When the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the exposed position, the image light is projected onto the second flat surface (projection surface) 304b.

  The flat screen member 304 is supported by a pair of crank arms 378A and 378B (described later) of the projection member moving mechanism 305, and the flat screen member 304 is rotated by the rotation of the pair of crank arms 378A and 378B. The crank arms 378A and 378B are rotatably supported by the support plates 351A and 351B, respectively.

(5) Projected Member Moving Mechanism The projected member moving mechanism 305 includes support plates 351A and 351B, a pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352, and a flat screen member moving mechanism 353, as shown in FIGS. .

Both of the support plates 351A and 351B are configured as substantially rectangular plate-like members whose surfaces are vertically long,
The support plates 351A and 351B are arranged to face each other with an appropriate distance (interval larger than the width of the trapezoidal member 302) in the left-right direction (the long side direction of the pseudo reel member 303). The support plates 351A and 351B are fixed to the mounting surface 311a of the pedestal 311 of the storage case 301 using a fixing member such as a screw. A pseudo reel member 303 is disposed between the support plate 351A and the support plate 351B.

  Further, the support plates 351A and 351B respectively support the rotation arms 332A and 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 so as to be rotatable. The support plates 351A and 351B have a through-hole through which a shaft 374 described later of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 passes and a through-hole through which the rotary shaft 335 of the rotary arms 332A and 332B in the pseudo reel member 303 passes. Is provided.

  Further, the support plate 351B is provided with a stopper 355, a first sensor 356, and a second sensor 357. The stopper 355 is a member for limiting a rotation range of a drive gear 362 described later of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352. The first sensor 356 detects a later-described crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the standby position. The second sensor 357 detects a later-described crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 when the flat screen member 304 is moved to the exposed position.

  The pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 includes a drive motor 361 and a drive gear 362. The drive motor 361 is fixed to the motor fixing portion 314b of the right side wall 314 in the storage case 301 using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 361 is attached to the right side wall 314 so that the rotation shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 361 meshes with the drive gear 362.

  The drive gear 362 is constituted by a gear member having a substantially semicircular surface, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The drive gear 362 is disposed on the surface of the support plate 351B that faces the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. In addition, a rotation shaft 335 of a rotation arm 332B (see FIG. 11 described later) of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the center of the drive gear 362.

  The flat screen member moving mechanism 353 includes a drive motor 371, intermediate gears 372 and 373, a shaft 374, crank gears 375 and 376, and crank arms 378A and 378B. The drive motor 371 is fixed to the support plate 351B using a fixing member such as a screw. At this time, the drive motor 371 is attached to the support plate 351B so that the rotation shaft 371a of the drive motor 371 meshes with the intermediate gear 372.

  The intermediate gear 372 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. One end of a shaft 374 that protrudes through a through hole 314 a (see FIG. 8) provided in the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301 is connected to the center of the intermediate gear 372.

  The intermediate gear 373 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. The other end of the shaft 374 protruding through a through hole 313 a (see FIG. 8) provided in the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301 is connected to the center of the intermediate gear 373.

  The shaft 374 is provided through the support plates 351A and 351B and rotatably supports the support plates 351A and 351B. Since the intermediate gear 373 is connected to the intermediate gear 372 via the shaft 374 as described above, the intermediate gear 373 rotates together with the intermediate gear 372.

  The crank gear 375 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the right side wall 314. At this time, the crank gear 375 is disposed so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 372. A crank pin 375a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 372 facing the support plate 351B.

  The crank gear 376 is disposed between the support plate 351 </ b> A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the left side wall 313. At this time, the crank gear 376 is disposed so as to mesh with the intermediate gear 373. A crank pin 376a is formed on the surface of the intermediate gear 373 facing the support plate 351A.

  The crank arm 378A is disposed between the support plate 351A and the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351A. The crank arm 378 </ b> A includes an arm portion 381 formed of a plate-like member extending in a substantially L shape, and a connection portion 382 provided at one end of the arm portion 381.

  The arm portion 381 is provided with a rotation shaft 384 that is rotatably engaged with the support plate 351A, and an engagement groove 385 that extends linearly. The engagement groove 385 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 381 that faces the left side wall 313 of the storage case 301. A crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 385.

  The connection part 382 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 382 is continuous with the arm portion 381, and the other surface (plane) is in contact with the first plane 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 382 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 using a fixing member such as a screw.

  The crank arm 378B is disposed between the support plate 351B and the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301, and is rotatably supported by the support plate 351B. The crank arm 378 </ b> B has an arm portion 391 configured by a plate-like member extending in a substantially L shape, and a connection portion 392 provided at one end of the arm portion 391.

  The arm portion 391 includes a rotation shaft (not shown) that is rotatably engaged with the support plate 351A, a linearly extending engagement groove 395, a first detection piece 396, and a second detection piece 397. Is provided. The engagement groove 395 is provided on the surface of the arm portion 391 that faces the right side wall 314 of the storage case 301. A crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 395.

  The first detection piece 396 is provided at a position between the connection portion 392 and the engagement groove 395, and protrudes outward from a side portion of one of the arm portions 391 (on the back surface side in FIG. 9). When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the standby position, the first detection piece 396 is detected by the first sensor 356 provided on the support plate 351B.

  The second detection piece 397 is provided below the first detection piece 396 and protrudes outward from one side of the arm portion 391. When the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 moves the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the second detection piece 397 is detected by the second sensor 357 provided on the support plate 351B.

  The connection part 392 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular surface. One surface of the connecting portion 392 is continuous with the arm portion 391, and the other surface (plane) is in contact with the first plane 304a of the flat screen member 304 (see FIG. 8). The connecting portion 392 is fixed to the first flat surface 304a of the flat screen member 304 using a fixing member such as a screw.

[Status when using trapezoidal members]
Next, a state when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the projection target block 202 when the trapezoidal member 302 is a projection target of image light.

  In the state where the trapezoidal member 302 is the projection target of the image light, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are arranged at the respective standby positions.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the standby position, the pseudo reel member 303 is located behind the trapezoidal member 302, and the inner peripheral surface 331a of the circular arc plate portion 331 is directed forward. At this time, one radial portion (one radial side portion) of the drive gear 362 contacts the stopper 355 (see FIG. 9). Therefore, when the projection block 202 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side), the rotation of the drive gear 362 clockwise (clockwise) is locked by the stopper 355.

  Further, when the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the standby position, the flat screen member 304 is positioned above the trapezoidal member 302 and the first flat surface 304a faces downward. At this time, the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 provided on the crank arm 378B of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 150 detects that the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the standby position.

  The pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 (projection member) arranged at the standby position are not interposed between the trapezoidal member 302 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the trapezoidal member 302 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and becomes a projection target of the image light.

  Video light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a (see FIG. 8 for the projection surface 324a) of the trapezoidal member 302 that is the projection target. Is done. Thereby, the image | video used for an effect is displayed on each projection surface of the trapezoid member 302 which is a projection object, and it becomes visible to a player.

  In this embodiment, image light is projected onto the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the floor plate portion 321 and the three wall plate portions 322, 323, and 324 (see FIG. 8 for the wall plate portion 324) of the trapezoidal member 302. The video used for production is displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform a novel effect in which a stereoscopic effect and a depth can be felt in the video with a simple configuration without increasing the cost. As a result, the player's interest in video display effects can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the trapezoidal member 302 applied as the projection member has four projection planes that intersect at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the projected image light. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the projection member according to the present invention, for example, a projection member having two or three projection surfaces intersecting at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light is used. Alternatively, a projection target member having five or more projection surfaces that intersect at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the image light may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration example in which the trapezoidal member 302 is fixed at a predetermined position is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the trapezoidal member according to the present invention, for example, a trapezoidal member that is movable between a standby position where the image light emitted from the projector is not projected and an exposure position where the image light emitted from the projector is projected may be used. Good. Further, in this case, as the movement mode of the trapezoidal member, for example, a mode in which the trapezoidal member rotates around an appropriate axis or a mode in which the trapezoidal member moves linearly may be used.

[Operation of pseudo reel member]
Next, the operation of the pseudo reel member 303 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a state of the projection target block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 12 is a longitudinal sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of image light.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is a projection target of the image light, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (the state shown in FIGS. 11 and 12). At this time, the flat screen member 304 is maintained in the state of being placed at the standby position.

  In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 to the exposure position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the drive gear 362 is viewed from the right side (right side wall 314 side) of the projection target block 202 in the drawing. Is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) (see thick arrow in FIG. 11).

  Since the rotation shaft 335 provided on the rotation arm 332B of the pseudo reel member 303 is connected to the drive gear 362, when the drive gear 362 is rotated counterclockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the standby position to the left. Rotate around. When the other radius portion of the drive gear 362 comes into contact with the stopper 355, the counterclockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the pseudo reel member 303 is arranged at the exposed position.

  When the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the exposed position, the pseudo reel member 303 covers the front of the trapezoidal member 302. At this time, the flat screen member 304 arranged at the standby position is not interposed between the pseudo reel member 303 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the pseudo reel member 303 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and becomes a projection target of the image light.

  Image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the outer peripheral surface 331b (hereinafter referred to as “projection surface 331b”) of the pseudo reel member 303 that is the projection target. As a result, an image used for production is displayed on the pseudo reel member 303 that is the projection target, and can be visually recognized by the player.

  In order to move the pseudo reel member 303 from the exposure position to the standby position, the drive motor 361 of the pseudo reel member moving mechanism 352 is driven, and the drive gear 362 is viewed from the right side of the block to be projected 202 in the drawing. Rotate clockwise (clockwise).

  When the drive gear 362 rotates clockwise, the pseudo reel member 303 rotates clockwise from the exposure position. When one radial portion of the drive gear 362 contacts the stopper 355 (state shown in FIG. 9), the clockwise rotation of the drive gear 362 is locked by the stopper 355. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the pseudo reel member 303 is disposed at the standby position.

  In the present embodiment, image light representing a reel is projected onto a curved projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Thereby, it can be shown that the reel is physically present in the cabinet 2a facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 (front door 2b). As a result, it is possible to provide a novel effect in which a stereoscopic effect and depth can be felt with a simple configuration without increasing the cost, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect of displaying the image.

[Operation of flat screen member]
Next, the operation of the flat screen member 304 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state of the projection target block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the projection target block 202 when the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light.

  In the case where the flat screen member 304 is a projection target of image light, the flat screen member 304 is moved from the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 10) to the exposed position (the state shown in FIGS. 13 and 14). At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 is maintained in the state of being placed at the standby position.

  In order to move the flat screen member 304 to the exposed position, the drive motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the intermediate gear 372 is viewed from the right side (right wall 314 side) of the projection target block 202 in the drawing. Is rotated clockwise (clockwise) (see thick arrow in FIG. 13).

  One end of a shaft 374 is connected to the intermediate gear 372, and an intermediate gear 373 (see FIG. 9) is connected to the other end of the shaft 374. Therefore, when the intermediate gear 372 rotates clockwise when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing, the intermediate gear 373 also rotates clockwise.

  When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate clockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the projected block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing. The crank pin 375a of the crank gear 375 is engaged with the engagement groove 395 of the crank arm 378B, and the crank pin 376a of the crank gear 376 is engaged with the engagement groove 385 of the crank arm 378A.

  Therefore, when the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate counterclockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B so as to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise), respectively. As a result, the flat screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates counterclockwise from the standby position when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing.

  When the second sensor 357 detects the second detection piece 397 of the crank arm 378B, the drive motor 371 stops driving and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 stops. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the exposed position.

  When the flat screen member 304 is disposed in the exposed position, the flat screen member 304 covers the front of the trapezoidal member 302. At this time, the pseudo reel member 303 disposed in the standby position is not interposed between the flat screen member 304 and the opening 10a (see FIG. 2) of the front panel 10. Therefore, in this state, when viewed from the player side, the flat screen member 304 is exposed to the opening 10a of the front panel 10 and is a projection target.

  The image light incident from the projector 213 of the projection block 201 via the reflection mirror 237 is projected onto the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 that is the projection target. As a result, the video used for production is displayed on the flat screen member 304 that is the projection target, and is visible to the player. For example, by projecting image light representing a two-dimensional image onto the projection surface 304b that is a plane of the flat screen member 304, the same image as when the image is displayed on a display device using a flat panel such as a liquid crystal display device. You can show the video to the player.

  In order to move the flat screen member 304 from the exposed position to the standby position, the driving motor 371 of the flat screen member moving mechanism 353 is driven, and the intermediate gear 372 is seen from the right side of the projection target block 202 in the drawing. 373 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  When the intermediate gears 372 and 373 rotate counterclockwise, the crank gears 375 and 376 (see FIG. 9) rotate clockwise when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing. When the crank gears 375 and 376 rotate clockwise, the crank pins 375a and 376 press the crank arms 378A and 378B so as to rotate clockwise. As a result, the planar screen member 304 connected to the crank arms 378A and 378B rotates clockwise from the exposure position when the projection target block 202 is viewed from the right side in the drawing.

  Thereafter, when the first sensor 356 detects the first detection piece 396 of the crank arm 378B, the drive motor 371 stops driving, and the rotation of the flat screen member 304 stops. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the flat screen member 304 is disposed at the standby position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, white paint is applied to the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304. Then, image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface 304 b of the flat screen member 304. White and silver (gray) have at least a constant reflectance of visible light, and white has a higher light reflectance than silver. Therefore, the two-dimensional image projected onto the white projection surface 304b can be made easier to see than the two-dimensional image projected onto the projection surface 304b coated with silver paint, for example.

  On the other hand, silver (gray) paint is applied to the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoid member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303. Therefore, the projection surfaces 321a, 322a, 323a, and 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303 have a more three-dimensional image than when white paint is applied to these projection surfaces. It can be made to look three-dimensional.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. The pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. In addition, since the structure of the hopper apparatus 51 was mentioned above, the description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key switch 54 is used when changing the setting (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachi-slot 1.

  The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. It is. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. The power supply board 53 b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44 and also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

  The pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a checkout switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, a sub-relay board 61, a first testing machine interface board 401, and a second testing machine interface board 402. Since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The BET switch 77 (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable main reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display 6 (7-segment display) and the LED 82. The LED 82 includes, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter referred to as “first LED” to “first LED”) that are turned on in correspondence with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as “inserted number”). LED for lighting a medal insertion mark, a game start mark, a replay mark, etc. based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81) Etc. are included. In the first to third LEDs (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED is turned on, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs are turned on, and three medals (game) When the startable number of sheets is inserted, the first to third LEDs are turned on. Since the information display device 6 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Both the first interface board 401 for testing machine and the second interface board 402 for testing machine are relay boards used when various signals relating to games are output to the testing machine in the pachislot 1 certification test (trial fire test) ( Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot machine 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 401 for testing machine and the testing machine. Various electronic components necessary for connection to the second interface board 402 are not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the first interface board 401 for a testing machine and determined by the main control board 71, for example. The test signal related to the pushed navigation in order is output via the second interface board 402 for the testing machine.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. Further, the pachislot 1 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61, the speaker group 84, the LED group 85, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63, the touch sensor 19, and the projection member moving mechanism 305 (display unit). ). Since the touch sensor 19 and the projection member moving mechanism 305 have been described above, descriptions thereof are omitted here.

  The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10 and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores opening / closing history information of the middle door 41. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 150) when the middle door 41 is opened.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a display device relay substrate 87 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the display device relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 151, production images (videos), sound (speaker groups 84), light (LED groups 85), and communication data. . The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a specific example of a nonvolatile storage unit (storage unit) according to the present invention.

  The display device relay board 87 is a board that relays connection wiring between the sub control board 72, the projector 213 included in the display device 11, and the sub display device 18. Since the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 have been described above, description thereof is omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, and a switching regulator 94 (power supply means).

  The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for gaming machines. Note that the microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (instruction codes dedicated to the main CPU 101) unique to the microprocessor 91 that can be defined on the source program. In this embodiment, by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101, the processing efficiency and the program capacity are reduced. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

  The power management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 15). The power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the “XSRST” terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the startup voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5 V) from 12 V), a power interruption detection signal is output to the “XINT” terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal (start signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means to output (power failure means).

  The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (DC power supply voltage of 5 V DC) for the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

  The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage means), a main RAM 103 (second storage means), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, A random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115 are included. These units constituting the microprocessor 91 are connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

  The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 and performs control related to the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

  The main CPU 101 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a provided reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 150, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, each reel) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected to the microprocessor 91. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 includes, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and the like, and the clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is received by other components (for example, the timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. Note that the clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

  The reset controller 106 resets an IAT (Illegal Address Trap) or WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a multiplication instruction (“MUL” instruction) on the source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on this instruction.

  The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 generates a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte soft latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from a predetermined range of random numbers generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) for signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, the power management circuit 93) provided outside the microprocessor 91. . The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to one of the input ports PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and the latch signal is sent from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at a timing (on edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. Is output. In the random number circuit 110, when the latch signal is input, the random number register 0 is latched, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

  The interrupt controller 112 performs an interrupt process by the main CPU 101 based on a power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a time-out signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Control the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93 or a time-out signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. Based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to the time-out signal from the timer circuit 113, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing, reel control processing, communication data transmission processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, timer Various interrupt processing such as update processing is performed.

  The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)). Count elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

  The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 402 for the testing machine.

<Sub control circuit>
[Sub-control circuit configuration]
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 150 (sub control means) mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 150 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The sub control circuit 150 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 150 basically includes a sub CPU 151, a sub RAM 152, a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 153, a VRAM (Video RAM) 154, and a driver 155. The VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) includes a frame buffer and a screen buffer, which will be described later. The sub CPU 151 is a specific example of the control processing unit according to the present invention, the GPU 153 is a specific example of the image processing unit according to the present invention, and the VRAM 154 is a volatile storage unit. One specific example is shown.

  The sub CPU 151 is connected to the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The driver 155 is connected to the display device relay board 87. That is, the driver 155 is connected to the projector 213 and the sub display device 18 via the display device relay board 87.

  The sub CPU 151 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 151 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and a random number value for production are extracted, and production registration for determining and registering production contents (production data). Various programs for executing tasks are included. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the display device 11 based on the determined content of the presentation, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84 Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of the program are also included.

  The data storage area stores a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and animation data (including image data and virtual object data described later) relating to the creation of video. Storage area to be included. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 152 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

  The sub CPU 151, the GPU 153 (rendering processor), the VRAM 154, and the driver 155 create a video according to the animation data specified by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the display device 11 (projector 213) and / or the sub display device 18. . The display device 11 (projector 213) and the sub display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub control board 72.

  Further, the sub CPU 151 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM in accordance with the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 151 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

[Direction registration task]
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the sub control circuit 150 receives command data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the sub control circuit 150 responds to the type of the command data based on the received command data. The display device 11 (projector 213), the sub display device 18, the speaker group 84, and the LED group 85 are driven to perform the effect control.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, an effect determination task (effect registration task) executed by the sub control circuit 150 (sub CPU 151) corresponding to the type of command data will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the effect registration task in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 151 extracts a message from the message queue (S1). Next, the sub CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a message in the message queue (S2). When the sub CPU 151 determines in S2 that there is no message in the message queue (when S2 is NO), the sub CPU 151 performs the process of S5 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 151 determines in S2 that there is a message in the message queue (when S2 is YES), the sub CPU 151 copies game information from the message (S3). In this process, for example, information related to the internal winning combination (main lottery flag, etc.) specified by the parameters, the type of reel that has stopped rotating, the display combination, the game state flag, and other various data are stored in the sub-RAM 152. Copied to an area (not shown).

  Next, the sub CPU 151 performs effect content determination processing (S4). In this process, the sub CPU 151 determines the contents of the production, registers the production data, etc. according to the type of the received command.

  After the processing of S4 or when S2 is NO, the sub CPU 151 performs animation data generation and registration processing (S5). The animation data generation and registration process is performed based on the effect data (effect contents) registered in the effect content determination process of S4. In the present embodiment, in this process, a process for creating image data of video light projected on various projection members is performed. The creation processing of image data of video light projected on various projection members (PJ-compatible image data described later) will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, an example in which image data of video light projected on various projection members during the process of S5 (video signal corresponding to video light emitted from the projector 213) is described will be described. The invention is not limited to this, and may be executed, for example, in the effect content determination process of S4, or the animation data generation process and the registration process may be performed separately.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 performs sound data registration processing (S6). Next, the sub CPU 151 registers lamp data (S7). In addition, these registration processes are performed based on the effect data (effect content) registered in the effect content determination process of S4. Then, after the process of S7, the sub CPU 151 returns the process to S1, and repeats the processes after S1.

<Image data creation method>
Next, in various effects executed by the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, image data (projector) of image light projected on the projection surfaces of various projection members (the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304). A method of creating a video signal corresponding to the video light emitted from 213 will be described.

[Outline of image data creation method]
With reference to FIG. 20A and 20B, the outline | summary of the production method of the image data of the image light projected on various projection target members is demonstrated. 20A is a diagram showing a conversion process of image data in the image data creation process, and FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a flow of main processes executed in the conversion process of image data.

  In the method of creating image data of image light (PJ-compatible image data described later) projected on various projection members in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20B, resource image / object combination processing, viewpoint change image data acquisition is performed. The setting process and the SB image data setting process are executed in this order. The contents of each process will be described below.

(1) Resource Image / Object Combining Process In the resource image / object combining process, first, projection target members (the trapezoidal member 302, the pseudo reel member 303, and the flat screen member 304) that are projection targets stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 are used. Virtual object data (three-dimensional data) is selected (acquired). The virtual object data is, for example, data generated (converted) from the three-dimensional CAD data of the projection member, and is data indicating the three-dimensional structure (coordinates) of the projection member. The virtual object data indicates a specific example of information for displaying an image on the display unit according to the present invention.

  In the resource image / object combination processing, resource image data (two-dimensional data) of image data to be projected onto the projection target member is selected (acquired) from the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The resource image data shows a specific example of the original image data according to the present invention.

  The selection processing of the virtual object data and the resource image data is controlled by the sub CPU 151, and the sub CPU 151 is determined from the plurality of types of image data and the plurality of types of virtual object data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The resource image data and the virtual object data corresponding to the production contents are selected. Also, the selected resource image data and virtual object data are expanded in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer (FB) and the screen buffer (SB) described later in the VRAM 154. The virtual buffer is a specific example of the first buffer according to the present invention, and the frame buffer is a specific example of the second buffer (predetermined buffer) according to the present invention. The screen buffer is a specific example of the third buffer (specific buffer) according to the present invention.

  Next, the selected virtual object is placed in the virtual space (VRAM 154) on the sub-side arithmetic processing. Specifically, the selected virtual object data is expanded on the VRAM 154. Next, in the virtual space, the direction from the player side toward the virtual object (hereinafter referred to as “player's eye direction”): In an actual gaming machine, the display device cover 30 and the display device 11 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). When the video light of the selected resource image data is irradiated (projected) virtually on the projection surface of the virtual object in the direction from the position on the player side opposite to Image data (hereinafter referred to as “virtual projection image data”) of an image projected (projected) onto the surface is calculated (generated) by an arithmetic process. The virtual projection image data is generated when the GPI 153 performs three-dimensional CG processing (including three-dimensional coordinate calculation) on the virtual object data and the resource image data and combines the two data. This synthesis operation processing can be executed using an algorithm used in conventional three-dimensional image programming or the like. The virtual projection image data is a specific example of data of the first viewpoint image (predetermined viewpoint image) according to the present invention, and the player's line-of-sight direction is the first direction according to the present invention. A specific example of (predetermined direction) is shown.

  The series of processes from the above-described acquisition (development) processing of virtual object data and resource image data to the combination processing of both data (virtual projection image data generation processing) is the resource image / object combination processing shown in FIG. 20B. This process is performed, and is executed by the GPU 153 based on a command from the sub CPU 151. The resource image / object combination processing is performed on the VRAM 154.

  When the virtual object data having three-dimensional space coordinates and the resource image data having two-dimensional space coordinates are combined by the GPU 153, the two-dimensional coordinates of the resource image data are converted into three-dimensional coordinates. In this conversion process, for example, Coordinate conversion processing may be performed sequentially on all the coordinates of the resource image data, or the coordinates for a predetermined reference number (for example, half of the total number of coordinates) out of the total number of coordinates. Conversion processing may be performed. When the latter method is adopted, for example, coordinate conversion processing is performed on coordinates arranged at a predetermined interval with one or more coordinates in between. And the value of the coordinate located between the coordinate in which the coordinate conversion process was performed is calculated by processes, such as linear interpolation, for example. When the latter method is adopted, it is desirable to set the reference number (the number of coordinates) for conversion to a number (conversion amount) according to the processing performance of the GPU 153. Note that the processing performance of the GPU 153 is determined according to the processing speed of the GPU 153 and the number of cores included in the GPU 153 (the number of cores of a general GPU is about 64 to 2048), and the processing performance of the GPU 153 is low. In this case, the conversion reference number (coordinate number) is reduced, and when the processing performance of the GPU 153 is sufficiently high and low, the conversion reference number (coordinate number) is increased.

  As described above, in the virtual projection image data generation processing (composition processing of resource image data and virtual object data) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (the total number of coordinates or a predetermined reference number) in the resource image is two-dimensional. Since the coordinates are directly converted into three-dimensional coordinates by three-dimensional CG processing, for example, each boundary portion between the four projection surfaces 321p, 322p, 323p, 324p of the virtual object 302p (for example, the lower side portion of the projection surface 322p) And a boundary portion between the projection surface 321p and the upper side portion of the projection surface 321p) can be minimized.

  In this embodiment, an example has been described in which virtual object data and resource image data are selected and acquired from the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and both the acquired data are combined on the VRAM 154, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, first, a plurality of types of virtual object data and a plurality of types of resource image data are loaded (read) from the ROM cartridge substrate 86 into an area other than the above-described virtual buffer, frame buffer, and screen buffer on the VRAM 154. Then, predetermined virtual object data and predetermined resource image data are selected from the loaded multiple types of virtual object data and multiple types of resource image data, and then the selected both data are used in the present embodiment. Similarly, a virtual buffer, a frame buffer, and a screen buffer may be developed and combined. In this case, among the plurality of types of resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, only a plurality of resource image data belonging to the corresponding effect group is loaded based on, for example, the game state or the effect state. May be.

(2) Viewpoint-changed image data acquisition / setting process In the viewpoint-changed image data acquisition / setting process, first, the image light (projection light) of the resource image data from the direction of the player's line of sight with respect to the projection plane of the virtual object in the virtual space. ) In a virtual projection state (a state in which virtual projection image data is generated), the incident direction of video light that is actually incident on the projection surface of the projection target member (hereinafter referred to as “actual video light incident direction”). Image data (hereinafter referred to as “virtual photographed image data”) when the virtual projection image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object is photographed virtually (pseudo) is generated by arithmetic processing. That is, in the state where the image light of the resource image data is virtually projected from the direction of the player's eye on the projection plane of the virtual object, the viewpoint is changed and the image data virtually projected on the projection plane of the virtual object is obtained. calculate. The virtual photographed image data shows a specific example of the data of the second viewpoint image according to the present invention, and the actual incident direction of the video light is a specific example of the second direction according to the present invention. Is shown.

  In this virtual shooting process, first, the incident direction of the actual video light with respect to the virtual object is set (set) in the virtual space. In the present embodiment, as the actual incident direction of the image light, the incident direction of the image light incident on the projection surface of the projection member from the projector 213 via the reflection mirror 237, that is, the projection of the projection member from the reflection mirror 237. The direction toward the surface is set.

  Next, the virtual projection image projected on the projection plane of the virtual object is converted into the actual video light by the three-dimensional CG processing of the GPU 153 (including coordinate calculation from the actual video light incident direction (virtual camera position)). Is converted into a virtual captured image obtained when the image is virtually captured from the incident direction side (virtual projection image data developed on the VRAM 154 is converted into virtual captured image data). It should be noted that this virtual captured image data generation processing (conversion processing from virtual projection image data to virtual captured image data) can be executed using an algorithm used in conventional three-dimensional image programming or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the viewpoint changing process and the virtual photographed image data generating process at the time of generating the virtual captured image data described above are performed by the viewpoint changing image data acquisition / setting process shown in FIG. 20B. It is executed by the GPU 153 based on a command from the CPU 151. The viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process is performed on the VRAM 154.

  Here, in FIG. 21, in the virtual space, the state in which the image light of the resource image is virtually projected from the direction of the player's eye on the projection surface of the virtual object of the projection target member, and the actual image light A state in which a virtual projection image projected on the projection plane of the virtual object is virtually taken from the incident direction is shown. FIG. 22 shows a specific example of the virtual projection image generated by the virtual projection operation of the resource image in the virtual space. 21 and 22 show an example in which the projection target to be projected with the image light is a trapezoidal member 302. FIG.

  When the image light of the resource image data is virtually projected on the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 arranged in the virtual space from the player's line of sight (arrow A2 direction in FIG. 21), as shown in FIG. A resource image is virtually projected on each of the four projection surfaces 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p, and a virtual projection image is generated. As a result, the resource image is converted into a three-dimensional image (virtual projection image) having a depth reflecting the shape of the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 as shown in FIG. This virtual projection image is an image similar to an actual image visually recognized when the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is viewed from the player side in the real space. At this time, when the projection target of the image light is the trapezoidal member 302 or the pseudo reel member 303, since the shape of the projection surface is a three-dimensional shape, a three-dimensional virtual projection image having a depth is obtained. However, when the projection target of the image light is the planar screen member 304, a planar virtual projection image is obtained.

  Then, in a state where the resource image is virtually projected on each of the four projection planes 321p, 322p, 323p, and 324p of the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302, the actual incident direction of the image light (arrow A1 in FIG. 21). Direction), when the virtual projection image projected on the projection plane of the virtual object is virtually captured, the virtual projection image is converted into a virtual captured image from the direction of the arrow A1.

  When the image light (projection light) corresponding to the virtual photographed image generated as described above is actually projected on the projection surface of the projection member from the projector 213 via the reflection mirror 237, the actual image light is incident. When the projection surface of the projection target member is viewed from the direction (the reflection mirror 237 side), the image displayed on the projection surface is the same as the virtual photographed image generated in the virtual space. In this situation, the actual image seen when the projection surface of the trapezoidal member 302 is viewed from the player side is the same image as the virtual projection image generated in the virtual space. That is, when the image light (projection light) corresponding to the virtual photographed image data is actually projected from the projector 213 through the reflection mirror 237 onto the projection surface of the projection member, the player side projects the projection surface of the projection member. A projected image (a three-dimensional image having a depth) similar to the virtual projected image reflecting the shape of can be seen.

  In this embodiment, in the series of image data conversion processing from the resource image data to the virtual captured image data described above, not the image data corresponding to the size of the projection surface (screen size) of the projection member, but the projection member The image data having a size twice the size of the projection plane is used as the image data to be processed.

  Specifically, as image data to be processed, an image in which dummy image data having the same size as the projection surface is added to the upper end of the image data of the image (projection target image) projected on the projection surface of the projection target member. Data (image data in which the size in the height (vertical) direction of the image in the virtual space is twice that of the projection target image) is used. That is, the image data to be processed in the series of image data conversion processing from the resource image data to the virtual captured image data described above is obtained when the projection angle of view (viewing angle) in the height direction of the video light is doubled. Size image data (hereinafter also referred to as “double angle of view data”). Therefore, for example, when the size of the screen (projection plane) (projected image size) is 1280 pixels (horizontal) × 800 pixels (vertical), the image data to be processed (double view angle data) The size is 1280 pixels (horizontal) × 1600 pixels (vertical).

  In the present embodiment, the resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 is previously composed of double angle of view data. Therefore, at the time when the resource image data is read out in the resource image / object combination processing, the mode of the image data to be processed is double angle of view data. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 is image data including only the projection target image (screen (projection plane) size image data), and the resource image / object composition is performed. In the processing, the double-view angle data may be generated by adding dummy image data to the read resource image data.

  In the present embodiment, the reason why the double angle of view data having the above-described configuration is used as the image data to be processed is as follows. Normally, when the light emitted from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member, image distortion occurs at the center of the upper end or lower end of the image projected on the projection surface due to the optical characteristics of the projector 213. This is because, in general projectors, projection lenses are designed in advance on the assumption that image light is projected onto the screen at an irregular angle (a trapezoidal angle of view with a short long side). It is. Note that the position where the image is distorted (the center of the upper end or lower end of the video) is, for example, an attachment mode of the projector 213 inside the housing (with the upper (ceiling) surface of the projector 213 facing upward, Depending on whether it is attached (upside down)) or the area of use of the projection lens (upper half or lower half). In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, an example will be described in which the projection block 201 is configured such that image distortion occurs at the center of the upper end of the image projected on the projection plane.

  Further, the resource image data is generally generated as data for a liquid crystal display device in many cases, and the resource image data is also generated as data for a liquid crystal display device in this embodiment. In the liquid crystal display device, since image distortion occurs at the center position on the screen, the GPU 153 (or VDP) performs processing for suppressing (correcting) image center distortion with respect to the resource image data.

  Therefore, as in this embodiment, when the GPU 153 processing target data is double angle-of-view data in which a dummy image is provided above the image (projection target image) that is the target of virtual projection and virtual shooting. The GPU 153 performs processing for suppressing (correcting) image distortion at the center of the image of the double field angle data. In this case, since the center of the image of the double angle of view data is the center on the boundary line between the dummy image and the projection target image, distortion of the image at the center position of the upper end portion of the projection target image is suppressed (corrected). . As a result, the image at the position where the image distortion occurs when the image is actually projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member by the projector 213 is corrected. In the present embodiment, this image distortion correction processing is performed on the double angle of view data expanded (stored) in the frame buffer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in the virtual buffer. Image distortion correction processing may be performed on the expanded double angle of view data.

  That is, in the present embodiment, image distortion in the resource image data (double view angle data) generated for the liquid crystal display device by using the double view angle data having the above-described configuration as the processing target data of the GPU 153. Is adjusted so that the position of occurrence (center of the double angle of view data) coincides with the position of distortion generated in the image actually projected by the projector 213 (center of the upper end of the projection target image). As a result, it is possible to suppress (correct) in advance image distortion that occurs when an image is actually projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member by the projector 213 at the stage of generating PJ-compatible image data. It is possible to provide a high-quality production image to the player.

  As resource image data, for example, when projector data (image data in which distortion occurs at the center of the upper end or lower end of a video) is prepared in advance, a series from resource image data to virtual captured image data is prepared. In the image data conversion processing, the same-size angle-of-view data without providing a dummy image may be used as processing target data. In this case, the GPU 153 performs processing for suppressing (correcting) image distortion at the center of the upper end portion or lower end portion of the image of the equal magnification angle-of-view data.

  20B is set in a frame buffer (FB) provided in the VRAM 154 (rendering RAM), and this setting process is performed by the GPU 153 ( Controlled by a rendering processor). As described above, the image data set in the frame buffer (FB) is double angle-of-view data (virtual photographed image data + dummy image data), so that the frame buffer (FB) set in the VRAM 154 The size (the size of the virtual captured image data storage area) is also twice the size of the projection surface (screen size) of the projection target member.

(3) SB image data setting process In the SB image data setting process, the image data of the projection target image among the double angle of view data (virtual captured image data + dummy image data) set in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154. That is, only the virtual photographed image data is transferred to the screen buffer (SB) provided in the VRAM 154. Specifically, the image data in the area where the virtual captured image data is stored in the storage area of the frame buffer is copied to the screen buffer (dummy image data is not transferred to the screen buffer).

  Thereby, image data of the image light actually projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member (hereinafter referred to as “PJ-compatible image data”) is generated, and the PJ-compatible image data is stored in the screen buffer of the VRAM 154. Note that the GPU 153 controls processing for generating the PJ-compatible image data (transfer processing of the virtual captured image data to the screen buffer). In addition, since the PJ-compatible image data is ½ the size of the image data to be processed, the size of the screen buffer of the VRAM 154 in which the PJ-compatible image data is set can be ½ of the frame buffer size. it can.

  Here, FIG. 23 shows an outline of the SB image data setting process. In the viewpoint change image data acquisition / setting process shown in FIG. 20B, when virtual captured image data is set in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, a dummy is placed in the upper half area of the frame buffer (FB) on FIG. Image data is stored, and virtual captured image data is stored in the lower half area. Next, when the SB image data setting process in FIG. 20B is performed, only the data in the area where the virtual captured image data is stored in the frame buffer is transferred (copied) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154, and The transferred image data is set as PJ-compatible image data.

  After that, the PJ compatible image data set in the screen buffer is a video signal (for example, “V-by-one (registered trademark)”, “Display Port (registered trademark)”, “LVDS”, “Clockless Link (registered trademark)). ) ”, A video signal having an interface specification such as an analog RGB component video signal), and the video signal is output to the projector 213. Then, the projector 213 emits video light corresponding to the PJ-compatible image data based on the input video signal. In the present embodiment, as described above, image data of image light (PJ-compatible image data) actually projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member is generated. Hereinafter, the above-described method for generating PJ-compatible image data (and its video signal) according to the present embodiment is referred to as a “virtual projection imaging method”.

[Outline of generation of PJ-compatible image data when the projection member is movable]
21 to 23, as an example of generating PJ-compatible image data, the example in which the projection target of the projection target of the image light is only the trapezoidal member 302 (single movable target member) has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the above-described method for generating PJ-compatible image data based on the virtual projection imaging method can be applied to a case where image light is projected in an effect in the process of switching the projection target member to be projected.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 24A to 24E, an outline of generation of PJ-compatible image data in the process of switching the projection target member from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 will be described. 24A to 24E show the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 that are arranged in the virtual space in the process of switching the projection target member from the trapezoid member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303. It is a figure which shows the time change (time series change) of the positional relationship between these.

  24A to 24E, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 is shown in a simplified manner in order to clarify the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303. Specifically, the size of the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 is shown smaller than the actual size (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  FIG. 24A shows a position where the pseudo reel member 303 starts to appear above the trapezoidal member 302 when viewed from the player side after the start of switching from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 (after the start of driving of the pseudo reel member 303). FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a virtual object 302p of a trapezoidal member 302 and a virtual object 303p of a pseudo reel member 303 when moving to a position. FIG. 24B is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the upper part of the trapezoid member 302. FIG. 24C is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 moves to the vicinity of the upper front portion of the trapezoid member 302. FIG. 24D is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302 and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 when the pseudo reel member 303 starts to move to the front surface of the trapezoid member 302. 24E shows a state where the pseudo reel member 303 is moved to a position that covers the front surface (projection surface) of the trapezoidal member 302, and the projection member switching operation from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 is completed. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the virtual object 302p of the trapezoid member 302, and the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303. FIG.

  Thus, when the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projection member) moves to the front surface of the trapezoidal member 302, first, the pseudo reel member moved to the corresponding position at every predetermined timing (every time series). Virtual object data (hereinafter referred to as “synthesized virtual object data”) of a virtual object (hereinafter referred to as “synthesized virtual object”) obtained by combining the virtual object 303p of 303 and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 is acquired. For example, in each of FIGS. 24A to 24E, composite virtual object data of the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 that is moving to the corresponding position and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 is acquired.

  Note that a control method for moving the virtual object 303p to the corresponding position in the virtual space is as follows. First, a frame that is generated based on pulse output data (not shown) of the drive motor 361 that is driven when the pseudo reel member 303 is moved from the state of FIG. 24A to the state of FIG. 24E and that displays an image. Time series data (hereinafter, “movement angle data”) of the movement angle of the pseudo reel member 303 corresponding to the rate (30 fps in the present embodiment) is acquired. Next, using the acquired movement angle data, the virtual object 303p is moved to the corresponding position at every predetermined interval (for example, every frame) by the three-dimensional CG processing (including three-dimensional coordinate calculation etc.) of the GPU 153. Then, data (virtual object data) of the moved virtual object 303p is generated.

  In the present embodiment, movement angle data for each predetermined timing (for example, for each frame) acquired when the movable projection member is operating is prepared in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, data (virtual object data) of the virtual object 303p moved to a corresponding position at every predetermined interval is generated in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Alternatively, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 moved to the corresponding position and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 may be combined at each predetermined interval to generate combined virtual object data. Further, for example, synthesized virtual object data for each predetermined interval timing may be generated in advance and stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86, and the corresponding synthesized virtual object data may be read and used for each predetermined interval timing. Further, the predetermined interval at which the synthesized virtual object data is acquired can be arbitrarily set according to, for example, the frame rate of the video (moving image), the content of the video display effect, and the like.

  Next, the image light of the resource image data (double view angle data including the dummy image) is virtually projected from the player's eye direction (the direction of arrow A2 in FIG. 21) to the composite virtual object arranged in the virtual space. Then, a virtual projection image is generated by combining the resource image and the combined virtual object. Then, in a state where the resource image is virtually projected on the projection plane of the synthesized virtual object, the virtual projected on the projection plane of the synthesized virtual object from the actual incident direction of the video light (the direction of the arrow A1 in FIG. 21). A projected image is virtually photographed, and virtual photographed image data (double view angle data including a dummy image) is acquired.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the projection target member to be projected is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303, the virtual object 303p of the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projection member) and the virtual object 302p of the trapezoidal member 302 are used. The processing other than the generation of the combined virtual object data at each predetermined interval is performed by using the trapezoidal member 302 (single movable object) as the projection target of the image light described above with reference to FIGS. This is the same as the processing in the case of only the projection member.

  Here, an example in which the PJ-compatible image data generation method by the virtual projection imaging method is applied when the projection target member is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, even when the projection target member is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the flat screen member 304, by using the combined virtual object data of the flat screen member 304 and the trapezoidal member 302 generated at every predetermined interval timing, The above-described method for generating PJ-compatible image data based on the virtual projection imaging method can be applied as it is. In addition, for example, when executing a linked video display effect using a movable projection member and a non-movable projection member, the movable projection member and the non-movable projection member generated at a predetermined interval timing are used. By using the synthesized virtual object data, the above-described method for generating PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method can be applied as it is. Furthermore, for example, even in a gaming machine having a function of executing an image display effect linked using three or more projection members, by using the composite virtual object data of three or more projection members, The above-described method for generating PJ-compatible image data using the virtual projection imaging method can be applied as it is.

[Procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data]
Next, referring to FIG. 25, the sub-control circuit 150 performs PJ-compatible image data generation processing (a series of processing from resource image / object synthesis processing to video signal output processing) by virtual projection imaging. A specific processing procedure will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of processing for generating PJ-compatible image data and a video signal corresponding to the PJ-compatible image data by the virtual projection imaging method.

First, the sub CPU 151 selects resource image data to be displayed this time from various resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (S11). The image data selected in the process of S11 is double angle-of-view data in which a dummy image having the same size as the resource image is added to the upper end portion of the resource image. In this process, the GPU 153
The (rendering processor 153) expands the selected resource image data (double view angle data) in the VRAM 154 (drawing RAM) based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 selects the virtual object data of the projection target member to be projected this time from the various virtual object data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (S12). In this process, when the projection target member to be projected is one projection target member, only virtual object data of the projection target member is selected. In this process, when there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected, the combined virtual object data corresponding to the current timing is selected. In this process, the GPU 153 expands the selected virtual object data in the VRAM 154 based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  In the processing of S11 and S12, the selected resource image data and virtual object data are developed in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer (FB) and the screen buffer (SB) in the VRAM 154. Further, the processing order of S11 and S12 is arbitrary, and the processing of S11 may be performed after the processing of S12.

  Next, the GPU 153 places the selected virtual object on the virtual space (VRAM 154), and in the direction from the player side toward the virtual object (the player's line of sight) with respect to the projection plane of the virtual object. The image light of the selected resource image data is virtually projected (irradiated) to generate (calculate) image data (virtual projection image data) of the virtual projection image displayed on the projection plane of the virtual object (S13). In this processing, the resource image data (double view angle data including dummy image data) developed on the VRAM 154 in S11 by the three-dimensional CG processing (including three-dimensional coordinate calculation etc.) of the GPU 153 is transferred to the VRAM 154 in S12. Is combined with the virtual object data expanded in (2) to generate (calculate) virtual projection image data (double view angle data including dummy image data).

  Next, the GPU 153 determines, in the virtual space, the projection surface of the virtual object from the incident direction (actual image light incident direction) of the projection light incident on the projection surface of the projection target member from the projector 213 via the reflection mirror 237. Virtually captured image data (double view angle data including dummy image data) when the virtual projected image displayed on the screen is virtually captured is generated (calculated) (S14). In this process, viewpoint change processing is performed by three-dimensional CG processing (including coordinate calculation and the like) of the GPU 153, and virtual captured image data (double view angle data including dummy image data) is generated (calculated).

  Next, the GPU 153 develops (sets) the virtual photographed image data (double view angle data including dummy image data) generated in S14 in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 (S15). Next, the GPU 153 extracts the image data of the area (the lower half area of the frame buffer in FIG. 23) in which the virtual captured image data is stored from the double angle of view data expanded in the frame buffer (FB). The image data is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ compatible image data (S16).

  The GPU 153 converts the PJ-compliant image data copied to the screen buffer (SB) in S16 into a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the projector 213 (S17). In the present embodiment, PJ-compatible image data (video signal) to be output to the projector 213 is generated as described above.

[Effects]
As described above, in this embodiment, image data (virtual projection image) of an image displayed on the projection plane of the virtual object when image light is virtually projected onto the virtual object of the projection member arranged in the virtual space. Image data (PJ-compatible image data) that is actually projected onto the projection member is generated using the data and the virtual captured image data). Therefore, when the image light is actually projected onto the projection member by the projector 213, it is not necessary to perform a correction process for associating the projection image data with the shape of the projection surface (screen) of the projection member. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a variety of video display effects with high image quality using the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in cost related to CG creation.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the image data to be processed in the image data conversion process from the resource image data to the generation of the virtual captured image data is the projection surface size (screen size) of the projection target member. Is image data (double angle of view data) in which a dummy image having the same size as the image is added above the projection target image. In this case, distortion occurs at the center of the upper end portion of the projection target image. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, distortion at the center of the upper end portion of the projection target image is suppressed in advance at the stage of PJ-compatible image data generation processing ( Corrected). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the distortion of the image actually displayed on the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member, and to provide the player with a high-quality effect image.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when there are a plurality of projection members irradiated with image light, the above-described virtual projection photographing method (virtual projection processing and virtual of image light) is performed on the combined virtual object of the plurality of projection members. By applying the method of generating PJ-compatible image data by (imaging processing), it is possible to actually generate image data of image light to be projected onto the projection target member. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when an image is projected onto an object such as a three-dimensional object (stereoscopic screen) using a projector, the deviation of the projected image with respect to the object can be suppressed to a minimum.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a movable projection member (pseudo reel member 303 etc.) is included in the plurality of projection members and the movable projection member is in operation, the synthesis is performed at predetermined timing intervals. By applying the PJ-compatible image data generation method based on the virtual projection imaging method described above to a virtual object, it is possible to actually generate image data to be projected onto the projection target member. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, even if the configuration (number, shape, arrangement relationship) and interlocking of the projection target members are complicated, it is possible to easily execute various image display effects with high image quality. .

<Various modifications>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention have been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and includes various other embodiments and modifications without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[Modification 1]
In the above-described embodiment, when there are a plurality of projection target members (for example, see FIG. 24), the above-described virtual projection imaging method (video) is performed on the composite virtual object of the plurality of projection members in the virtual space. Although an example in which the PJ-compatible image data generation method using the virtual light projection process and the virtual photographing process is applied has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, PJ-compatible image data may be generated by the following procedure.

  First, the virtual object of each projection member is disassembled from the synthesized virtual object. Next, the virtual projection processing of the image light of the resource image is executed on each decomposed virtual object, similarly to the above embodiment, to create virtual projection image data. The synthesized virtual object indicates a specific example of the first virtual object according to the present invention, and the virtual object of each projection member indicates a specific example of the second virtual object according to the present invention. Is. Further, the virtual photographed image data of each projection member shows a specific example of the data of the first viewpoint image according to the present invention.

  Next, the virtual projection image data of each virtual object is synthesized. Next, in the same manner as in the above embodiment, virtual shooting processing (viewpoint change processing) is executed on the synthesized virtual projection image data to create virtual shooting image data, and the virtual shooting image data is stored in the frame of the VRAM 154. Store in buffer. Then, an image transfer (copy) process is executed on the virtual photographed image data stored in the frame buffer in the same manner as in the above embodiment to generate PJ-compatible image data. Note that the synthesized virtual projection image data is a specific example of the data of the synthesized image according to the present invention.

  Here, an example of the technique of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a method for generating PJ-compatible image data in the first modification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 26, the trapezoidal member 302 described in the above embodiment and a pair of columnar projection members 501 and 502 (hereinafter referred to as “a pair of columnar members 501” as a plurality of projection target members to be projected. , 502 ”) and an elliptical projection target member 503 (hereinafter referred to as“ elliptical sphere member 503 ”) will be described (see the projection object in FIG. 26). In this example, a pair of columnar members 501 and 502 are disposed on the front surface (player side) of the trapezoidal member 302, and an elliptical spherical member 503 is disposed on the front surface (player side) of the pair of columnar members 501 and 502. An example of arrangement will be described. Further, each of the pair of columnar members 501 and 502 is a movable projection member that can be rotationally driven with the central axis in the extending direction of each columnar member as a rotation axis. Each of the columnar members 501 and 502 and the elliptical spherical member 503 also represents a specific example of the display unit according to the present invention.

  In the method for generating PJ-compatible image data in this example, first, in a virtual space, a virtual object (composite virtual object) of a projection object, a virtual object A of a trapezoidal member 302, and a pair of cylindrical projection target members 501, The virtual object B is decomposed into a virtual object B 502 and a virtual object C of an elliptical spherical projection member 503. Next, for each decomposed virtual object, the image light of the resource image is virtually projected from the direction of the player's line of sight, and the virtual projection of each virtual object obtained by combining each virtual object data and the resource image data Generate image data.

  Next, the virtual projection image data of each generated virtual object is synthesized. At this time, virtual projection image data of a plurality of virtual objects are combined in consideration of the arrangement relationship of the virtual objects. Specifically, in a region where a plurality of virtual objects overlap in the virtual space, a plurality of virtual projections are displayed so that an image projected on the projection surface of the virtual object located at the forefront (most player side) is displayed. Image data is synthesized. As a result, the synthesized virtual projection image data (hereinafter referred to as “synthesized virtual projection image data”) shown at the bottom in FIG. 26 is generated. Thereafter, similarly to the above embodiment, the combined virtual projection image data is converted into virtual photographed image data, and PJ-compatible image data is generated based on the virtual photographed image data.

  When the above-described method for generating PJ-compatible image data in this example is used, even if there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected and a three-dimensional screen is configured by the plurality of projection target members, Virtual captured image data can be generated for each virtual object, and the generated virtual projection image data can be combined to generate combined virtual projection image data of a stereoscopic screen composed of a plurality of projection target members. Therefore, when PJ-compatible image data is created by the method of this example, the deviation of the projected position of the image from the ideal position when actual image light is projected onto a stereoscopic screen made up of a plurality of projection members is minimized. It can be suppressed to the limit. That is, with the method of this example, it is possible to minimize the deviation of the projected image with respect to the stereoscopic screen (object) made up of a plurality of projection members.

  Also in this example, as in the above embodiment, when the image light is actually projected onto the projection member by the projector 213, the projection image data is associated with the shape of the projection surface (screen) of the projection member. Since correction processing is not required, it is possible to execute a variety of video display effects with high image quality using the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost associated with CG creation.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in virtual projection processing and virtual shooting processing of an image in a virtual space, double-view angle data obtained by adding a dummy image having the same size as the image above the projection target image is an image to be processed (calculated). Used as data. When generating the PJ-compatible image data, the image data of the area in which the virtual captured image data is stored in the double-view angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 is used as the PJ-compatible image data. A method of copying to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 was used. However, the method of converting the double view angle data into the PJ-compatible image data (the method of extracting the PJ-compatible image data from the double view angle data) is not limited to the example of the above embodiment.

  For example, the process of extracting the virtual captured image data from the double angle of view data before expanding the double angle of view data including the virtual captured image data generated by the virtual shooting process in the virtual space into the frame buffer (FB). May be provided. In the second modification, as an example, an example will be described in which projective conversion processing is performed on double-view angle data including virtual pick-up image data to extract virtual pick-up image data from double-view angle data.

  In the three-dimensional CG technology, the projective transformation process is an arithmetic process that is normally used when a virtual three-dimensional object arranged in a virtual space is projected on a screen. First, a general projective transformation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 27A and 27B.

  In FIG. 27A, a rectangular object placed at a predetermined position on the projector side (light source side) (“near” in FIG. 27A) is enlarged and projected to the screen placement position (“far” in FIG. 27A). It is a figure which shows the mode when doing. In FIG. 27B, the coordinates of the rectangular object arranged at “near” in FIG. 27A are converted into the coordinates of the rectangular object projected on the screen (“far” in FIG. 27A). It is a figure which shows the projection matrix P (projection transformation matrix) used for this purpose.

  The projection matrix P is a 4 × 4 square matrix. In the projection matrix P, the value of the [1 (row), 1 (column)] component is “x”, the value of the [2,2] component is “y”, and the value of the [3,1] component is “A”, the value of the [3,2] component is “b”, the value of the [3,3] component is “c”, and the value of the [3,4] component is “−1”. Yes, the value of the [4,3] component is “d”. The values of the other components are “0”.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B, the values (x, y, a, b, c, d) of the respective components in the projection matrix P are the rectangular object position “near” and the screen position “far”. ”, Parameters“ top ”and“ bottom ”that specify coordinates in the height (vertical) direction of the rectangular object before projection (before projective transformation), coordinates in the width (horizontal) direction of the rectangular object before projection Parameters “left” and “right” that define the height, length (height) “height” in the height direction of the rectangular object after projection (after projective transformation), and length (width) “width” in the width direction , Based on the viewing angle “fovy” (projection angle of view) of the light (projection light) emitted from the projector (light source) and the aspect ratio “aspect” of the screen.

  When the coordinates of the rectangular object at the position “near” in FIG. 27A are multiplied by the projection matrix P in FIG. 27B (coordinate conversion is performed using the projection matrix P), the position “far” in FIG. 27A is obtained. The coordinates of the rectangular object projected (enlarged and displayed) on “)” are calculated.

  In this example, the projection matrix P of FIG. 27B is modified and used to extract virtual photographed image data from double field angle data including virtual photographed image data. That is, in this example, image data having a size twice the screen size (double view angle data) is converted into screen size image data (equal size view angle data). Note that the double angle of view data used in this example adds a dummy image of the same size as the image to the upper end of the image projected onto the projection surface of the projection target member (projection target image), as in the above embodiment. Image data (see FIG. 23).

  FIG. 28 shows a projection matrix Pe used in this example when virtual captured image data (PJ-compatible image data) is extracted from double angle-of-view data including virtual captured image data. In this example, as the projection matrix Pe, a matrix obtained by multiplying the projection matrix P ′ and the offset matrix O is used as shown in FIG. The projection matrix Pe is a specific example of a specific conversion parameter according to the present invention.

  The projection matrix P ′ is a 4 × 4 square matrix, and is a projection transformation matrix in which the viewing angle (fovy) is set to ½ (predetermined angle) in the general projection matrix P shown in FIG. 27B. . In this example, as described above, since the double angle of view data is converted to the equal angle of view data, the viewing angle (projection angle of view) is set to a value half that of a general projection matrix P. The The offset matrix O includes values of [1 (row), 1 (column)], [2,2], [3,3], [4,4], and [4,2]. It is “1” and is composed of a 4 × 4 square matrix whose other component values are “0”. The projection matrix P ′ represents a specific example of the predetermined projective transformation parameter according to the present invention, and the offset matrix O represents a specific example of the predetermined offset parameter according to the present invention.

  In this example, the double-angle data coordinates are multiplied by the projection matrix Pe before the double-angle data including the virtual captured image data is expanded in the frame buffer (FB). Thereby, only the virtual photographed image data is extracted from the double field angle data including the virtual photographed image data. In this specification, a specific example of the extraction result is not shown. However, in the inventor's verification experiment, the double-angle data of the configuration to be processed in this example is multiplied by the projection matrix Pe shown in FIG. 28 (projection transformation). ), It is confirmed that the virtual photographed image data is extracted from the double angle of view data including the virtual photographed image data.

  The virtual captured image data extracted by the technique of this example is developed in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 as in the above embodiment. Then, the virtual captured image data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 is copied to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data.

  As described above, in this example, since the size of the image data developed in the frame buffer (FB) is half that of the above embodiment, the size of the frame buffer (FB) is also half that of the above embodiment. Can be. Therefore, in this example, it is possible to perform the same three-dimensional CG processing as in the above embodiment using a frame buffer (FB) having the same size as the screen size, so that there is no waste in the usage status of the VRAM 154. The processing efficiency of the GPU 153 can be improved.

  Also in this example, as in the above embodiment, when the image light is actually projected onto the projection member by the projector 213, the projection image data is associated with the shape of the projection surface (screen) of the projection member. Since correction processing is not required, it is possible to execute a variety of video display effects with high image quality using the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost associated with CG creation.

  In the image data conversion process of this example, a determinant (matrix operator) is used as a specific example of the specific conversion parameter, the predetermined projective conversion parameter, and the predetermined offset parameter according to the present invention, and the calculation by the determinant is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, image data before and after conversion processing (pre-conversion data and post-conversion data) may be prepared in advance, and processing may be performed such that the pre-conversion data is directly replaced with post-conversion data by a predetermined conversion command or the like. In this case, a predetermined conversion command or the like is a specific example of a specific conversion parameter, a predetermined projective conversion parameter, and a predetermined offset parameter.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the example using the virtual projection photographing method has been described as the method for creating the PJ-compatible image data of the image light that is actually projected from the projector 213 onto the projection target member, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a technique called a texture mapping (projection mapping) method may be adopted as a technique for creating PJ-compatible image data.

  In Modification 3, a method for creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method will be described. The texture mapping method is a method of generating a three-dimensional image by virtually pasting a two-dimensional image on a three-dimensional object (model).

(1) Overview of Texture Mapping Method FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an overview of a method for creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method. In the example shown in FIG. 29, an example in which the projection target member to be projected is a trapezoidal member 302 (see FIG. 8) is shown. The same applies to the case of 303 or the flat screen member 304.

  In FIG. 29, the image data of the area A in the resource image data is mapped to the projection plane 322a (see FIG. 8) of the trapezoidal member 302, and the image data of the area B is mapped to the projection plane 321a of the trapezoidal member 302. An example in which the image data of C is mapped to the projection surface 323a of the trapezoidal member 302 and the image data of region D is mapped to the projection surface 324a of the trapezoidal member 302 is shown.

  The resource image data used in this example can be configured similarly to that of the above embodiment. In this example, image data to be processed in the process of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method is a dummy having the same size as the image at the upper end of the image to be projected, as in the above embodiment. This is double-angle data with an image added.

  In the texture mapping method, each pixel data of the resource image data in the double angle of view data is converted into the texture data of the trapezoid member 302 corresponding to the coordinates of each pixel (the coordinate data of the resource image and the coordinates relating to the structure of the trapezoid member 302). Image data (two-dimensional image data) after texture mapping is created by performing an operation of pasting to texture coordinates (UV coordinates) using (data). In FIG. 29, for simplification of description, only the pixel data of the coordinates of each vertex of the area A to area D in the resource image data is pasted to the coordinates (texture coordinates) of each vertex of the corresponding projection plane of the trapezoidal member 302. It shows how it is attached. The texture data indicates a specific example of texture information according to the present invention or information for displaying an image on the display unit, and the image data after texture mapping is pseudo three-dimensional image data according to the present invention. One specific example is shown.

  The texture coordinates of the texture data are data generated (converted) from the three-dimensional CAD data of the trapezoidal member 302. Specifically, the texture data corresponds to the data (x1, y1) to (x8, y8) of each vertex coordinate of the region A to the region D of the resource image and each vertex coordinate of the region A to the region D. Vertex coordinates (x1 ′, y1 ′) to (x8 ′, y8 ′) in the virtual object data of the trapezoidal member 302 are set. In the mapping process, the GPU 153 uses the pixel data of the vertex coordinates ((x1, y1) to (x8, y8)) of the region A to the region D of the resource image to correspond to the virtual object data of the trapezoid member 302. Are mapped to vertex coordinates ((x1 ′, y1 ′) to (x8 ′, y8 ′)). In this mapping process, the GPU 153 calculates coordinates between the vertex coordinates in the virtual object data by linear interpolation based on the coordinate data (vertex coordinates) of the texture data, and each of the coordinates other than the vertex coordinates of the resource image data. Pixel data is mapped to corresponding coordinates in virtual object data.

  Next, when the image data after texture mapping is generated, the double angle of view data including the image data is developed in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154. After that, among the double angle of view data developed in the frame buffer (FB), the image data of the area storing the texture-mapped image data to be projected is stored as the PJ-compatible image data in the screen buffer (VRAM 154). SB) is copied (transferred).

  Note that the method of creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method can be applied to the case where the projection target member to be projected described above with reference to FIG. 24 is switched from the trapezoidal member 302 to the pseudo reel member 303, for example. In this case, the resource image data is mapped (pasted) to the composite texture data of the texture data of the pseudo reel member 303 (movable projection member) in operation and the texture data of the trapezoid member 302, which is generated at each predetermined interval. PJ compatible image data can be generated.

  In addition, the PJ-compatible image data creation method of this example is also applicable to a case where the projection target member to be projected is a three-dimensional screen composed of a plurality of projection target members as shown in FIG. 26, for example. In this case, PJ-compatible image data is generated by acquiring composite texture data (3D screen texture data) of a plurality of projection members and mapping (pasting) resource image data to the composite texture data. be able to. In this case, similarly to the first modification, the composite texture data of a plurality of projection members is decomposed into the texture data of each projection member, and a resource image corresponding to the decomposed texture data of each projection member is obtained. Mapping may be performed, and the image data after mapping of each projection member may be combined to generate PJ-compatible image data.

(2) Procedure for creating PJ-compatible image data by texture mapping method Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a specific processing procedure of processing for generating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method performed in the sub-control circuit 150 will be described. explain. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure for generating PJ-compatible image data and a video signal corresponding to the PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method.

  First, the sub CPU 151 selects resource image data to be displayed this time from various resource image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (S21). The image data selected in the process of S21 is double angle-of-view data in which a dummy image having the same size as the resource image is added to the upper end portion of the resource image. In this process, the GPU 153 (rendering processor 153) expands the selected resource image data in the VRAM 154 (rendering RAM) based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  Next, the sub CPU 151 selects the texture data of the projection member to be projected this time from the texture data of the various projection members stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 (three-dimensional data related to the structure of the projection member). (S22). In this process, when the projection target member to be projected is one projection target member, only the texture data of the projection target member is selected. In this process, if there are a plurality of projection target members to be projected, synthetic texture data corresponding to the current timing is selected. In this process, the GPU 153 develops the selected texture data in the VRAM 154 based on a command from the sub CPU 151.

  In the processing of S21 and S22, the selected resource image data and texture data are expanded in the VRAM 154 in a buffer area (virtual buffer) other than the frame buffer and the screen buffer. Further, the processing order of S21 and S22 is arbitrary, and the processing of S21 may be performed after the processing of S22.

  Next, the GPU 153 performs texture mapping processing (S23). In this process, using the resource image data selected in the process of S21 and the texture data of the projection member selected in the process of S22, each pixel data of the resource image is converted to the projection surface of the corresponding projection member. A process (mapping) for pasting to a position is performed.

  Next, the GPU 153 develops (sets) the double angle-of-view data including the image data after the mapping process generated in S23 in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154 (S24). Next, the GPU 153 has an area in which the image data after mapping processing to be projected is stored in the double-view angle data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) (in FIG. 23, the lower half of the frame buffer). (Region) image data is copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data (S25).

  The GPU 153 converts the PJ-compliant image data copied to the screen buffer (SB) in S25 into a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the projector 213 (S26). In this example, PJ-compatible image data (video signal) to be output to the projector 213 is generated as described above.

(3) Various effects As in this example, when the texture mapping method is adopted as a method for creating PJ-compatible image data, PJ-compatible image data can be created by simpler processing. Various effects can be executed with high image quality using 3D CG while suppressing the increase. In this example, a movie after projecting image light onto a projection member can be prepared, so that even if the processing performance of a GPU (VDP (Video Display Processor)) is low, the movie can be played back without any problem. And texture mapping (projection mapping) can be used for general purposes.

  Further, in this example, the image data to be processed in the process of creating the PJ-compatible image data is image data (double view angle data) in which a dummy image having the same size as the image is added above the projection target image. . Therefore, also in this example, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to suppress the distortion of the image actually displayed on the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member in the image data creation stage, thereby producing a high-quality effect. Video can be provided to the player.

  Note that in the method for creating PJ-compatible image data by the texture mapping method, each pixel data of the resource image data is simply pasted to the coordinates of the texture data of the projection member corresponding to the coordinates of each pixel. This method is simpler than the method using the virtual projection imaging method described in the embodiment. However, in the technique using texture mapping, image distortion is likely to occur near the boundary between the projection surfaces of the trapezoidal member 302 shown in FIG. 29, for example, compared to the technique using the virtual projection imaging method. From the viewpoint of image quality, the method using the virtual projection imaging method described in the above embodiment is superior.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, the example in which the texture mapping process is performed in real time using the GPU 153 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, using the following method Also good. First, image data in which a resource image is mapped to a projection member in advance using a three-dimensional CG tool or the like is created, and the mapped image data is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Next, at the time of image display, the sub CPU 151 selects predetermined image data from the various image data after mapping stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 and outputs the image data to the projector 213 as PJ-compatible image data.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30, when generating PJ-compatible image data, out of the double angle-of-view data expanded in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, after mapping processing to be projected. Although the example in which the image data in the area storing the image data is copied to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154 as PJ-compatible image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the same manner as the method described in the second modification, the projection matrix Pe shown in FIG. 28 is multiplied (projection conversion) by double the angle-of-view data including the image data after the projection target mapping processing. You may extract the image data (same size field angle data) after the mapping process used as a projection object from 2 times field angle data. In this case, the extracted image data after mapping processing of the projection target (equal-size view angle data) is developed in the frame buffer (FB) of the VRAM 154, and the developed equal-size view angle data is used as PJ-compatible image data. Are copied (transferred) to the screen buffer (SB) of the VRAM 154.

[Other variations]
In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the projection surface 304b of the flat screen member 304 is configured as a plane and white paint is applied to the projection surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a print sheet may be attached to the projection surface 304b (second plane) of the flat screen member 304. In this case, for example, the print sheet may be divided into a plurality of areas, and different pictures or symbols may be formed in each area. Then, a video (image) that illuminates different pictures or symbols in a predetermined order may be displayed by video light emitted from the projector 213. In this case, a so-called roulette effect in which any picture (symbol) is selected can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the configuration example in which the pseudo reel member 303 and the flat screen member 304 are moved has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The projection member according to the present invention is not limited to one in which the entire projection member moves. For example, the projection member is provided with a movable portion, and a part of the projection member (movable portion) moves. Also good. In this case, by projecting the image light in accordance with the operation of the movable part, it is possible to display a lively image, and to enhance the interest of the production using the image.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the example which arrange | positions the display apparatus 11 which has the projector 213 in the position facing the opening 10a of the front panel 10 in the inside of the cabinet 2a, this invention is not limited to this. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, an opening may be provided in the waist panel 12, and a display device having a projector may be disposed at a position facing the opening of the waist panel 12 inside the cabinet 2a. Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the example which arrange | positions the display apparatus 11 inside the cabinet 2a, this invention is not limited to this. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a display device having a projector may be disposed on the front door 2b.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the image projected onto the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, an image in which the design varies according to the operation (start operation) of the start lever 16 may be adopted. In this case, on the projection surface 331b of the pseudo reel member 303, an image for stopping the changing symbol may be displayed in accordance with the pressing operation (stop operation) of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a method (front projection) in which an image is displayed by projecting light of a projector from the surface side of the projection surface (screen) of the projection target member has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, a method of projecting light from a projector from the back surface (rear surface) side of the screen to display an image (rear projection) may be employed, and even in this case, an optimum effect can be obtained. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, for example, a liquid crystal display device or a display device such as an organic / inorganic EL can be used instead of the projector.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the display device will be described. The pachislot of the second embodiment includes a display device 110 instead of the display device 11 (see, for example, FIG. 5) included in the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment. The display device 110 included in the pachislot machine according to the second embodiment differs from the display device 11 described above included in the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment in that the configuration of the projection target block and the front panel 10 are located behind the front panel 10. This is the point that the production unit 900 is provided. That is, the pachislot of the second embodiment includes a projection block 203 instead of the projection block 202. Further, a front panel 500 is provided instead of the front panel 10. Note that other configurations except the display device 110 (more specifically, the projection target block 203) are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the front effect unit 900 is provided, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 31 is an external perspective view of the display device 110 according to the second embodiment. The display device 110 includes a projection block 201 and a projection block 203 disposed below the projection block 201. On the projection target block 203, an image projected by the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected by a reflecting member 212 (for example, see FIG. 6). 32 is a perspective view of the projection block 203, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the projection block 203 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 shows the case where the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, which will be described later, and is projected from the projector 213 for reference. FIG. 34 shows a case where the image light is projected onto a projection surface 7141 of a second screen member 714 described later, and the image light projected from the projector 213 is a projection surface 7167 of a third screen member 716 described later. FIG. 35 shows a case where the projection is performed.

<Projected block>
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the projection block 203 includes a movable screen unit 700, a pair of screen drive bases (a left screen drive base 702 and a right screen drive base 704), and a lower part of the movable screen unit 700. A fixed base 708 provided, an upper base 706 provided on an upper back surface of the movable screen unit 700, a drive mechanism 815 capable of rotating a column body screen 710 included in the movable screen unit 700, and the movable screen unit 700. A rotating shaft 722 (see, for example, FIG. 33) that is the center of the rotating screen unit, a stopper mechanism 790 that prevents rotation of the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 49 described later), and the rotational direction of the movable screen unit 700 Detect position at Optical sensor unit 800 which serves as a position detecting means for (e.g., see FIG. 52 to be described later) provided with a.

(1) Movable Screen Unit FIG. 36 is an external perspective view of the movable screen unit 700. As shown in FIG. 36, the movable screen unit 700 includes a triangular columnar screen 710 having a hollow interior (see, for example, FIG. 37 described later), and a right base 732 that blocks the right side surface of the columnar screen 710 when viewed from the front. And a left base 736 (see FIG. 37 to be described later) that closes the left side surface of the pillar screen 710 when viewed from the front, and a rotating gear mechanism 740.

  In this specification, “front” means the front of the pachislot. Therefore, “front view” means that the pachislot is viewed from the front.

  FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view in which the movable screen unit 700 is disassembled into a columnar screen 710, a right base 732, a left base 736, and a rotating gear mechanism 740.

(1-1) Column body screen With reference to FIG.38 and FIG.39, the structure of the column body screen 710 is demonstrated. 38 and 39 are both exploded perspective views of the columnar screen 710, and the viewing angle of the columnar screen 710 is different between FIG. 38 and FIG.

  The column screen 710 includes a first screen member 712, a second screen member 714, and a third screen member 716. The first screen member 712, the second screen member 714, and the third screen member 716 are all formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  The first screen member 712 includes a rectangular flat panel 7121 and a flat panel base 7125.

  The flat panel 7121 has a projection surface 7123 (a lower surface shown in FIGS. 38 and 39) on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. The projection surface 7123 and the rear surface 7124 of the projection surface 7123 are displayed. Are both flat.

  The flat panel base 7125 is a base serving as a base of the flat panel 7121 and has a function of increasing the rigidity of the first screen member 712. The flat panel 7121 is fixed to the surface side of the flat panel base 7125 (the lower surface side shown in FIGS. 38 and 39) by a predetermined method such as an engaging means or an adhesive means. Further, the flat panel base 7125 is formed with a rib group 7126 made up of a large number of ribs on the back surface side (the upper surface side shown in FIGS. 38 and 39).

  The second screen member 714 has a rectangular shape in a front view and a projection surface 7141 on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. The projection surface 7141 is a view of the course from the bow. It is a concave curved surface that makes you feel like.

  The third screen member 716 includes a three-dimensional object 7166 and a three-dimensional object base 7161 whose outer shape in front view is rectangular. Both the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 function as a projection surface 7167 on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the three-dimensional object 7166 has a convex shape that makes an image of a spread book appear. The projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166 can display an image as if characters are written in a book or an image that turns a page by projection from the projector 213. The three-dimensional object base 7161 has two openings 7163, and the openings are blocked by the three-dimensional object 7166 so that the two openings 7163 cannot be seen in front view. The three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161 both have a surface functioning as a projection surface, but the three-dimensional object has a convex shape, and therefore the periphery thereof (for example, the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161). Has a shaded area.

  As described above, the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 are not limited to functioning as the projection surface 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. Of the three-dimensional object 7166 and the three-dimensional object base 7161, only the surface of the three-dimensional object 7166 may function as the projection surface 7167, and the surface of the three-dimensional object base 7161 may not function as the projection surface 7167.

  As described above, when the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 have different three-dimensional (undulation) shapes and image light corresponding to the three-dimensional shapes of the respective projection surfaces is projected from the projector 213, the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and so on. With the three-dimensional feature of the 7167 and the image light, it is possible to realize an effect rich in the presence of the player.

  FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the columnar screen 710 as seen from the direction in which the aspect in which the male rib 7145 is sandwiched between the female ribs 7164 described later can be visually recognized. FIG. 41 is a side view of the column screen 710 viewed from the right side.

  As shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the column screen 710 has the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 joined together. The end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 are joined together, and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 and the first side The end portions on the long side of the screen member 712 are joined to each other. In this manner, the three screen members 712, 714, 716 form a hollow triangular prism shape.

  In the second screen member 714, a groove 7142 is formed along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the first screen member 712. Then, the end of the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end of the long side of the first screen member 712 and the long side of the second screen member 714 are applied to this groove 7142. The ends are joined. Thereby, a gap between the two ends that may occur at the joint between the long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714 can be filled. Accordingly, the movable screen unit 700 is located at a position where the joint (the corner of the triangular prism) between the end on the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 can be seen in front view. Even if is located, the discomfort that can be imparted by reducing the gap between the long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714 is reduced. be able to.

  In addition, a groove 7143 is formed in the second screen member 714 along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the third screen member 716. Then, the end of the long side of the third screen member 716 and the end of the long side of the second screen member 714 and the long side of the third screen member 716 are applied to the groove 7143. The ends are joined. As a result, the gap between the two ends that can occur at the joint between the end on the long side of the second screen member 714 and the end on the long side of the third screen member 716 can be filled, and a gap can be formed. The discomfort that can be given by can be reduced.

  Further, a groove 7163 is formed in the third screen member 716 along the long side on the back surface on the side to be joined to the first screen member 712. Then, the end of the long side of the first screen member 712 and the end of the long side of the third screen member 716 and the long side of the first screen member 712 are applied to the groove 7163. The ends are joined. As a result, a gap between the long side end of the third screen member 716 and the long side end of the first screen member 712 can be filled and a gap can be formed. The discomfort that can be given by can be reduced.

  In this way, gaps that may occur at the corners (joint portions) of the triangular columnar columnar screen 710 are filled, so that even when the corners of the columnar screen 710 face the front, the projection from the projector 213 is performed. It is possible to suppress as much as possible that the continuity of the video to be interrupted, and it is possible to reduce discomfort that can be caused by the formation of a gap. Here, “video continuity is interrupted” means that when one image is projected, one image is divided like a shadow or streak that crosses the one image. It is equivalent to doing so. For example, when an unintended shadow or streak that crosses the character's face occurs while the character's face is projected, the projected image is interrupted, giving a sense of incongruity. There is a risk that interest will decline. Therefore, by filling the gaps that may occur at the corners of the prisms, it is possible to maintain the continuity of the video as much as possible, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  The second screen member 714 is formed with male ribs 7145 projecting from the back surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and in the vicinity of the joint portion with the third screen member 716 (for example, FIG. 39 and FIG. 40). reference). In addition, the third screen member 716 is formed with female ribs 7164 (two ribs) protruding from the back surface at portions corresponding to the above-described male ribs 7145 (for example, FIGS. 39 and 40, which will be described later). 44). When the ribs 7145 and 7164 are engaged, the male rib 7145 is sandwiched between the female ribs 7164, and the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined at both ends in the left-right direction. Is done.

  42 is an exploded perspective view in which the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are disassembled, FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional perspective view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 41, and FIG. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view in which a first screen member 712 and a third screen member 716 are disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the second screen member 714 has two rod-like arm members 7144 extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side toward the first screen member 712 side in the middle part in the longitudinal direction. Is provided. The arm member 7144 is fixed to the flat panel base 7125 via a screen locking member 718.

  More specifically, the screen locking member 718 is formed with two insertion holes 7182 into which the arm member 7144 can be inserted. A pair of screen locking ribs 7128 for fixing the screen locking member 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. Then, the arm member 7144 is inserted into the insertion hole 7182 and screwed with a screw 717, and then a pair of screen locking ribs 7128 and a screen locking member 718 are screwed with screws 719, thereby The first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined at the middle part in the left-right direction. By the way, when two screen members are joined, there is a gap between the two screen members (especially in the middle part) due to the clearance between the two screen members and the distortion that occurs when coating the screen paint. There is a fear. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are firmly joined at the middle part in the left-right direction, and thus the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714 are each. The generation | occurrence | production of the clearance gap between both which may arise in the middle part of the longitudinal direction of can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the three-dimensionally shaped object base 7161 constituting the third screen member 716 has two rod-like shapes extending from the back surface toward the flat panel base 7125 side in the middle part in the longitudinal direction. An arm member 7162 is provided. A pair of screen locking ribs 7129 for fixing the screen locking members 718 are formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125. The arm member 7162 is inserted into the insertion hole 7182 of the screen locking member 718 and then screwed with a screw 717, and then a pair of screen locking ribs 7129 and the screen locking member 718 are screwed with screws 719. By stopping, the first screen member 712 and the third screen member 716 are firmly joined at the middle part in the left-right direction. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the clearance gap between both which may arise in the middle part of the longitudinal direction of each of the 1st screen member 712 and the 3rd screen member 716 can be suppressed.

  The column screen 710 of the present embodiment is hollow, but is not limited to this, and is a solid or a mixture of a hollow portion and a solid portion (hereinafter referred to as “half-solid”). May be. For example, when it is desired to increase the rigidity of the column body screen 710, it is preferable that the column body screen 710 be solid, and when it is desired to reduce the weight of the column body screen 710, it is preferable that the column body screen 710 be hollow. Further, the ratio between the hollow portion and the solid portion may be changed as appropriate to reduce the weight as much as possible while maintaining the rigidity of the columnar screen 710. Furthermore, if the three-dimensional shapes of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 are different as in the present embodiment, an imbalance may occur when the column screen 710 is rotated. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio and the location of the solid part and the hollow part, it may be possible to prevent the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 from becoming unbalanced even though the three-dimensional shapes are different.

  The column screen 710 of the present embodiment is a triangular column screen 710, but is not necessarily limited to a triangular column, and may be a quadrangular column screen or a more polygonal column screen. However, considering that the screen on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed may be changed from the current screen to a specific screen, it is preferably a triangular prism body screen. Because in the case of a polygonal cylinder more than a quadrangular prism, it may be forced to go through an irrelevant screen before changing from the current screen to a specific screen, but in the case of a triangular prism You can change from the current screen to a specific screen without going through an irrelevant screen. This is because when the column screen is a triangular prism, any of the three screens is adjacent to the other two screens.

  Further, the column screen 710 of the present embodiment has a column shape, but is not necessarily a column screen. For example, the column screen 710 has a substantially L-shape formed by two screens adjacent to each other. The screen may be a substantially U-shaped screen composed of three screens adjacent to each other.

  Further, in the columnar screen 710 of the present embodiment, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is flat, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is concave, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 ( More specifically, the projection surface 7167 of the three-dimensional object 7166. The same applies hereinafter.) Has a convex shape, but is not limited thereto, and is a combination of a plurality of three-dimensional shapes among a flat shape, a concave shape, and a convex shape. May be.

  In addition, the column screen 710 of the present embodiment has all three projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 having different three-dimensional shapes. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the three-dimensional shape of at least one projection surface is other. If it is different from the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface, the visual impression can be changed and the interest can be enhanced. For example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 have the same three-dimensional shape, and only the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 has a different three-dimensional shape. Case corresponds.

  Further, the region size and the material of the projection surface on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed are the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the third screen. The projection surface 7167 of the member 716 may be the same or different.

(1-2) Right Base, Left Base, and Rotating Gear Mechanism With reference to FIG. 37, configurations of the right base 732, the left base 736, and the rotating gear mechanism 740 will be described.

  A trapezoidal right base 732 is attached to the opening end surface on the right side of the columnar screen 710, and a triangular left base 736 is attached to the opening end surface on the left side of the columnar screen 710. The right base 732 is extended with a small and high cylindrical portion 707 that protrudes to the surface side (right outward) of the columnar screen 710. A rotating gear mechanism 740 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 707.

  The right base 732 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7322 and a long side portion 7324, and two rod-shaped weight members 7326 are provided on the back surface (the left inner side) in the vicinity of the long side portion 7324. . Similarly, the left base 736 has a trapezoidal shape having a short side portion 7362 and a long side portion 7364, and two rod-like weight members 7366 are provided in the vicinity of the long side portion 7364 (right inward). .

  The weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided to balance the rotation of the column body screen 710. That is, the columnar screen 710 of the present embodiment has a different three-dimensional shape of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed. There is a possibility that a difference in weight occurs and the rotational balance becomes unbalanced. Such an imbalance is considered to occur when the rotation shaft 722 and the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the columnar screen 710 are greatly deviated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the weight members 7326 and 7366 are provided, and the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125 of the first screen member 712, or the three-dimensional object of the third screen member 716 is formed. By providing an opening 7163 in the base 7161, the center of gravity in the longitudinal direction of the columnar screen 710 is brought close to the rotation shaft 722 so that both are as coaxial as possible, and the rotation balance is prevented from becoming unbalanced. doing.

  Note that the number and installation location of the weight members 7326 and 7366, the number and formation location of the rib group 7126, the size and formation location of the opening 7163, and the like may be adjusted as appropriate.

  The column screen 710 has a cylindrical portion 707 and a rotating gear mechanism 740 on the right side (right base 732), but does not exist on the left side (left base 736). When a rotation is attempted, a torsional stress is applied to each screen member 712, 714, 716. In particular, the torsional stress applied to the first screen member 712 having a flat projection surface is considered to be significant. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as described above, the flat panel base 7125 is provided as the base of the flat panel 7121, and the rib group 7126 is formed on the back surface of the flat panel base 7125, so that the rigidity is increased. . That is, the rib group 7126 has both a function of suppressing the rotation balance from becoming unbalanced and a function of increasing rigidity.

  The first screen member 712 is attached to the back surface (more specifically, the back surface of the flat panel base 7125) at both ends in the longitudinal direction and the end on the side to be joined to the third screen member 716. A defining rib 7122 is formed (see, eg, FIGS. 36-41). The attachment defining rib 7122 has a triangular shape that closes the side surface of the columnar screen 710 by being adjacent to the short sides 7322 and 7362 of the bases 732 and 736. Therefore, when the right base 732 covers the right side surface of the columnar screen 710 with the right base 732, it is possible to easily determine the orientation of the right base 732 only by making the attachment defining rib 7122 and the short side portion 7322 adjacent to each other. In addition, when the left side surface 736 covers the left side surface of the columnar screen 710 with the left base 736, the orientation of the left base 736 is defined only by adjoining the attachment defining rib 7122 and the short side portion 7362.

  The attachment defining rib 7122 has a function of improving workability when the side surface of the columnar screen 710 is closed with the right base 732 and the left base 736, and is formed if the function can be maintained. The location and shape are not limited. For example, such attachment defining ribs 7122 are formed on the back surface of the third screen member 716 at both ends in the longitudinal direction and at the end where the first screen member 712 is joined. Also good. In addition, a part of the attachment defining rib 7122 is formed on the back surface of the first screen member 712 and a part of the attachment defining rib 7122 on the back surface of the third screen member 716 is formed. When the third screen member 716 is joined, an attachment defining rib 7122 that is adjacent to the short side portion 7322 of the right base 732 or the short side portion 7362 of the left base 736 may be formed. Further, an attachment defining rib 7122 may be formed at a joint portion between the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714, or the second screen member 714 and the third screen member 716 may be formed. Attachment defining ribs 7122 may be formed at the joints. Furthermore, the shape of the right base 732 or the left base 736 does not need to be trapezoidal. If the orientation of the right base or the left base can be defined by being adjacent to a positioning member such as the attachment defining rib 7122, the right base, The shape of the left base and the positioning member is not limited to a specific shape, and the number is not limited to one and may be two.

  The rotating gear mechanism 740 includes a large-diameter gear 742 and a gear-shaped portion 744 having a smaller diameter than that of the large-diameter gear 742, and the cylindrical portion 707 so as to be coaxial with the rotating shaft 722 of the columnar screen 710. It is fixed to.

  The large-diameter gear 742 has teeth formed on the entire circumference at a pitch of 5 degrees, and the gear-shaped portion 744 has protrusions 7442 protruding outward in the radial direction at a pitch of 10 degrees. That is, 72 teeth of 742 of the large-diameter gear 7 are formed at approximately equal intervals over the entire circumference, and 36 protrusions 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 are formed at approximately equal intervals over the entire periphery. However, the pitch of the teeth of the large-diameter gear 742 and the pitch of the protrusions 7442 formed on the gear-shaped portion 744 are not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate. The function of the gear-shaped portion 744 will be described later.

(2) Screen drive base, fixed base and upper base The screen drive base, fixed base and upper base will be described with reference to FIG.

  The screen drive base (the left screen drive base 702 and the right screen drive base 704) supports the rotating shaft 722 on both the left and right sides, and supports the movable screen unit 700, the fixed base 708, and the upper base 706 on both the left and right sides. Yes. More specifically, the left and right ends of each of the fixed base 708 and the upper base 706 are fixed by the left screen drive base 702 and the right screen drive base 704, and the movable screen unit 700 is installed in the internal space of the assembly of the plurality of bases. Is stored.

  The fixed base 708 is positioned below the movable screen unit 700, and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is formed in a curved shape so as not to prevent the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. A rectangular lower screen 7082 that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is provided at the front end of the fixed base 708. The lower screen 7082 functions as a projection surface on which an image projected from the projector 213 is displayed together with any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167 of the screen members 712, 714, and 716. That is, one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, 7167 of the screen members 712, 714, 716 and the lower screen 7082 form one projection surface (projection surface). However, the lower screen 7082 does not move (rotates) like the movable screen unit 700 (columnar screen 710), and functions as a fixed screen on which image light is projected from the projector 213.

  Note that there are a plurality of undulations on the surface of the lower screen 7082, which is a curved surface that curves in the front-rear direction. As a result, a three-dimensional effect can also be produced in the image projected on the lower screen 7082. However, the present invention is not intended to exclude the case where the lower screen 7082 is flat.

  The upper base 706 has a substantially L-shaped cross section that crosses the longitudinal direction (left-right direction), and the surface 7084 on the movable screen unit 700 side is curved so as not to prevent the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. Is formed.

(3) Drive mechanism The structure of the drive mechanism 815 is demonstrated referring FIG.45 and FIG.46. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the right screen drive base 704 and the drive mechanism 815. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit 700 viewed from the right side. In FIG. 46, however, illustration of a motor base 816, a motor 812, and a stopper mechanism 790 described later is omitted.

  The drive mechanism 815 is provided on the right screen drive base 704, and rotates the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 33) forward or backward about a rotation shaft 722 (see, for example, FIG. 33) as a rotation center. The projection plane on which the image light projected from the projector 213 is displayed (projected) can be switched. In the present embodiment, when the movable screen unit 700 is viewed from the right side, the clockwise rotation is the forward rotation (rotation in the direction in which the column screen 710 moves from bottom to top in front view), and the counterclockwise direction. The rotation around is defined as reverse rotation (rotation in a direction in which the column screen 710 moves from top to bottom in front view).

  The drive mechanism 815 mainly includes a motor 812 as a drive source for rotating the movable screen unit 700 (see, for example, FIG. 33), a speed reduction mechanism 818, and an intermediate gear 820.

  The motor 812 is a stepping motor having a drive shaft 814 and is attached to the right screen drive base 704 via a motor base 816 and a mechanism cover 810 described later. A gear group such as the speed reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 is covered with a mechanism cover 810.

  The speed reduction mechanism 818 includes a speed reduction gear 8182 and a driven gear 8184, and is rotatably supported by the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 819. The intermediate gear 820 is rotatably supported on the right screen drive base 704 via a bearing 821.

  A motor base 816 to which a motor 812 is attached is assembled to the mechanism cover 810. The rotation shaft (drive shaft 814) of the motor passes through the mechanism cover 810 and meshes with the driven gear 8184 to rotate the reduction gear 8182. The reduction gear 8182 meshes with the intermediate gear 820, and the intermediate gear 820 meshes with the large-diameter gear 742 of the rotation gear mechanism 740 of the right base 732 (see, for example, FIG. 37). The right screen drive base 704 is provided with a case region 830 that houses the rotation gear mechanism 740.

  A lower notch 832 is formed obliquely below and to the right of the case region 830. The large-diameter gear 742 is partially exposed to the lower notch 832 and meshed with the intermediate gear 820. Accordingly, when the motor 812 rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 rotates through the speed reduction mechanism 818 and the intermediate gear 820 based on the rotation of the drive shaft 814. The large diameter gear 742 is a movable screen unit by rotating a right base 732 (for example, see FIGS. 36 and 37) to which the large diameter gear 742 is fixed via a cylindrical portion 707 (for example, see FIG. 37). 700 rotates about the rotation shaft 722 as a center (axis).

  Here, the sub control board 72 outputs a motor drive control signal to the drive driver of the motor 812, and controls the rotation direction and rotation angle of the drive shaft 814. An upper notch 834 is formed in the upper part of the case region 830, and a part of the rotating gear mechanism 740 is exposed here. As will be described in detail later, a stopper mechanism 790 described later engages with the gear-shaped portion 744 of the rotating gear mechanism 740 via the upper notch portion 834 to prevent the movable screen unit 700 from rotating to the current position. It can be fastened.

(4) Rotation Axis FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the projection block 203 as viewed from above when cut in the horizontal direction so as to include the rotation axis 722. The left end of the rotation shaft 722 passes through the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 and is fixed to the boss portion 739A of the left screen drive base 702. The right end of the rotation shaft 722 passes through the center of the right base 732 (right base center hole 735) and the center of the rotation gear mechanism 740 and is fixed to the right screen drive base 704. The rotation shaft 722 is supported by the left base center hole 739 of the left base 736 via the left bearing 852 and is supported by the center hole 7402 of the rotation gear mechanism 740 via the right bearing 724. As a result, the movable screen unit 700 can rotate forward or backward about the rotation shaft 722 as the center (axis).

  A coil spring 725 is provided at the left end of the rotating shaft 722. The coil spring 725 is housed in the case body 854. The case body 854 has a left end that is not in contact with the boss portion 739A and a right end that is in contact with the left bearing 852, so that a constant distance can be maintained between the left base 736 and the left screen drive base 702. The left base 736 can be prevented from coming into contact with the left screen drive base 702. The coil spring 725 absorbs backlash in the left-right direction.

(5) Stopper Mechanism The configuration of the stopper mechanism 790 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the right side surface of the projection target block 203 as viewed from the front side. In FIG. 48, the right screen drive base 704 is not shown. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a state where the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is not blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a state where the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is blocked by the stopper mechanism 790. FIG. 51 is an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG.

  The stopper mechanism 790 includes a solenoid 792 that can be operated in the vertical direction, and a stopper 794 that moves up and down as the solenoid 792 moves up and down. After the solenoid 792 and the stopper 794 are accommodated in the case body 796, Attached to the right screen drive base 704.

  The solenoid 792 has a plunger 7922 (for example, see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) in an excited state where the coil is energized, and the plunger 7922 is directed downward when the coil is de-energized and becomes non-excited. Operates (falls).

  The stopper 794 is provided below the main body portion 7942 and connected to the main body portion 7942 so that it can move up and down in accordance with the vertical movement of the solenoid 792 (plunger 7922). And a stopper pin 7944 that moves up and down.

  The stopper mechanism 790 is disposed immediately above the gear shape portion 744. More specifically, the stopper mechanism 790 is arranged so that the stopper pin 7944 can advance and retract with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744.

  The sub-control board 72 uses a projection plane (any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) on which the image projected from the projector 213 is displayed as another projection plane (the other projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167). When the screen is changed to the projection plane, the motor 812 is driven to rotate the movable screen unit 700. The sub-control board 72 stops the movable screen unit 700 at the target position, and at the same time, the solenoid 792 is de-energized so that the stopper pin 7944 is inwardly of the gear-shaped portion 744 with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744. Advance in the direction (downward). When the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744 engages with a groove 7444 between one protrusion 7442 and another protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion 7442, Rotation is prevented. In this way, the sub control board 72 can stop the movable screen unit 700 at a desired rotational position.

  By the way, the stopper mechanism 790 has a knob 795 that can manually move the stopper pin 7944 up and down. Therefore, even if a displacement occurs when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the stopper pin 7944 that has advanced with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744 can be retracted by moving the knob 795 upward. When the stopper pin 7944 is retracted from the gear-shaped portion 744, the movable screen unit 700 can be manually rotated, so that the above-described positional deviation can be corrected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the stopper pin 7944 is cut (chamfered) so that the corner portion of the distal end portion is tapered toward the distal end portion. Thereby, even if the stopper 794 is caught in the middle of advancement and the advancement becomes incomplete, if the protrusion 7442 acts on the stopper pin 7944 by the rotation of the gear-shaped portion 744, the stopper pin 7944 is easily Thus, the operation failure of the movable screen unit 700 can be suppressed. In addition to this, the tip of the protrusion 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 is also cut so as to taper toward the tip. Therefore, when the stopper 794 advances with respect to the gear-shaped portion 744, it is possible to prevent the stopper 794 from being caught in the middle until the stopper 794 engages with the groove 7444.

  Further, the projection 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 has an inclined portion 74421 that is inclined so as to swell in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) from the proximal end portion toward the distal end portion. That is, the groove 7444 between one protrusion 7442 and another protrusion 7442 adjacent to the one protrusion has a bowl-like shape whose width in the circumferential direction decreases from the radially inner side to the radially outer side. ing. Therefore, once the stopper pin 7944 is engaged with the groove 7444, even if the stopper pin 7944 acts on the stopper pin 7944, the stopper pin 7944 can be prevented from being easily pushed upward.

  As described above, the protruding portion 7442 of the gear-shaped portion 744 has the inclined portion 74421 that inclines so as to bulge in the circumferential direction from the proximal end portion toward the distal end portion, but the stopper pin 7944 is shown in FIG. As described above, the upper side of the cut end portion extends in a substantially vertical direction without inclining. Therefore, when the stopper pin 7944 and the protruding portion 7442 come into contact with each other, the corner portion 74422 formed at the radially outer end of the inclined portion 74421 of the protruding portion 7442 and the stopper pin 7944 come into contact with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an inclined portion may be formed on the side surface of the stopper pin 7944 (the surface that contacts the protruding portion 7442) so that the surface contacts when the stopper pin 7944 contacts the protruding portion 7442. .

(6) Optical Sensor Unit With reference to FIGS. 45, 46 and 52, the configuration of the optical sensor unit 800 will be described. FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the movable screen unit as viewed from the right side, and shows the optical sensor unit 800 so that it can be visually recognized. The optical sensor unit 800 detects the position of the rotating movable screen unit 700 in the rotational direction. The optical sensor unit 800 uses an optical sensor, and the optical sensor between the light emitting element and the light receiving element of the optical sensor is blocked. Is detected, and the position is detected based on the timing when the optical path is blocked.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the optical sensor unit 800, in the right screen drive base 704, three optical sensors 802, 804, 806 are arranged radially at equal angular intervals. The optical sensor 802 detects that the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 is located in front, and the optical sensor 804 indicates that the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 is located in front. The optical sensor 806 detects that the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 is located in front. The optical sensor unit 800 is inserted and fixed in a radial groove 801 formed on the end surface of the case region 830 of the rotation gear mechanism 740 of the right screen drive base 704. That is, each optical sensor does not rotate with respect to the rotating movable screen unit 700.

  On the end face of the rotation gear mechanism 740 provided on the right base 732 (for example, see FIG. 36), a small arc-shaped light-shielding piece 791 projects at a right angle toward the optical sensor unit 800 side. The light shielding piece 791 has a width (length) of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The light shielding piece 791 blocks the optical paths of the three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 in order in the process of moving the light shielding piece 791 by the rotation of the movable screen unit 700. Since the optical path is blocked when the light shielding piece 791 passes between the light emitting element and the light receiving element, the sub-control board 72 that monitors the detection signal from the optical sensor has reached which optical sensor the light shielding piece 791 has reached. Can be determined. As described above, since the three optical sensors 802, 804, and 806 correspond to the screen members 712, 714, and 716, the sub-control board 72 depends on which optical sensor the light shielding piece 791 blocks in the rotation direction. The position of the movable screen unit 700 can be determined.

  Further, when one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches one of the optical sensors (one of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806), the tip of the screen appears on the front side, If the other end of the screen comes out of the front side when the other end of the light-shielding piece is separated from the optical sensor, the sub-control board 72 is based on the output timing of the optical sensor and the number of pulses of the motor drive signal. The position where the screen is present can be determined with high accuracy. Accordingly, the sub control board 72 can accurately project the image light on the screen, and can change the image light in accordance with the position of the screen.

  Further, as described above, the light shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. The rotation stop control of the movable screen unit 700 by the sub-control board 72 is based on the fact that one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction has reached the optical sensor (one of the optical sensors 802, 804, and 806). However, the length of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction takes into account the time until the movable screen unit 700 decelerates and actually stops. In this embodiment, since the length of the light shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction, it was performed in response to the fact that one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reached the optical sensor. However, the movable screen unit 700 has a predetermined position (for example, a position where the light shielding piece 791 rotates about 25 degrees in the same direction after one end of the light shielding piece 791 in the circumferential direction reaches the optical sensor). It is possible to perform control to stop at approximately the center position)). Further, if the light shielding piece 791 does not block the optical sensor when the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 is stopped, the sub control board 72 determines that a positional deviation has occurred and prompts the correction of the positional deviation. it can. Therefore, for example, even if a trouble such as displacement occurs, it is possible to correct the displacement immediately. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher visual image effect than before.

(7) Description of Operation of Movable Screen Unit The operation of the movable screen unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a diagram in which a front view and a right side view of the projection target block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 faces the front. FIG. 54 is a diagram in which a front view and a right side view of the projection block 203 are arranged side by side. The long side end of the first screen member 712 and the long side end of the second screen member 714 It is a figure when the junction part (corner | corner part of a triangular prism) with a part faces the front. FIG. 55 is a diagram in which a front view and a right side view of the projection target block 203 are arranged side by side, and is a view when the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 faces the front.

  When the motor 812 (see, for example, FIG. 45) rotates, the large-diameter gear 742 provided on the right base 732 is rotated by the operation of each member constituting the drive mechanism 815, and the movable screen unit 700 is centered on the rotation shaft 722. Rotate.

  The sub control board 72 can operate the movable screen unit 700 according to the gaming state. For example, in a general gaming state (for example, a non-ART gaming state), the movable screen unit 700 is kept stopped with the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 facing the front, which is more advantageous than the general gaming state. In a high notification game state (for example, ART game state, etc.), the second screen member 714 keeps the movable screen unit 700 stopped with the front facing the front, and the special notification game state is more advantageous than the notification game state. In (for example, a specialization zone etc.), the stop of the movable screen unit 700 can be maintained with the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716 facing the front.

  Then, when the gaming state shifts to another gaming state, the sub-control board 72 performs control to rotate the movable screen unit 700 so that the projection surface onto which the image projected by the projector 213 is projected faces. Run.

  Since the sub-control board 72 continuously projects the image projected from the projector 213 when the movable screen unit 700 is rotated, the rotation of the movable screen unit 700 can be visually recognized in front view. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, an image projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be viewed.

  The sub-control board 72 can project a video corresponding to the projection plane to be projected (video corresponding to the gaming state) as a video projected from the projector 213. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, it is advantageous when images projected on both the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 can be viewed. It is possible to simultaneously view a plurality of game state videos having different degrees.

  In addition, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect that causes the movable screen unit 700 to rattle (for example, an effect that quickly and repeatedly operates forward rotation and reverse rotation, hereinafter referred to as “rattling effect”). It is possible to perform an effect that expects whether or not to shift. In particular, in the pachislot of this embodiment, as described above, the light shielding piece 791 has a length of about 50 degrees in the circumferential direction. In the case of a triangular prism, it is necessary to rotate about 120 degrees in order to rotate the movable screen unit 700 from one projection plane to another projection plane. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 can execute an effect of rotating the movable screen unit 700 forward and backward within a range of approximately 70 degrees.

  For example, when the right end of the light shielding piece 791 illuminates the optical sensor 804, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be viewed in front view, but the projection surface 7141 is more than the projection surface 7123. Easy to see. In addition, when the left end of the light shielding piece 791 illuminates the optical sensor 802, both the projection surface 7123 and the projection surface 7141 can be viewed in front view, but the projection surface 7123 is more than the projection surface 7141. Easy to see. Therefore, depending on the game state transition expectation, by changing the projection plane that is easy to view between the two projection planes (for example, the projection plane 7123 and the projection plane 7141), the presentation is performed with high interest. be able to. For example, when it is determined that the sub-control board 72 shifts from the general game state to the notification game state, the projection surface 7141 is more likely to be visually recognized than the projection surface 7123 at a high frequency. When it is not determined to shift from the general gaming state to the notification gaming state, the projection surface 7123 is more likely to be visually recognized than the projection surface 7141 at a high frequency. Amusement entertainment can be enhanced.

  By the way, the image light projected from the projector 213 is reflected and projected onto the reflection mirror 237 (see FIG. 7) disposed on the upper front side, and thus projected at a predetermined angle toward the projection plane. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, when the corner of the triangular prism is facing the front, it is easy to make a shadow according to the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface. In particular, the projection plane 7141 and the projection plane 7167 are notable because the projection plane is not a flat shape but a three-dimensional shape. Even when the corners of the triangular prism are not facing the front, the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, when the image light projected from the projector 213 is projected onto the projection surface, it becomes a shadow. There may be a shadow area where no image is projected. The shadow area formed in this way can occur even if some image light is projected from the projector 213. For example, it may be possible to project image light from which the shadow area is formed from the projector 213, but such an image is projected from the projector 213 because the projection surface has a three-dimensional shape of a convex portion or a concave portion. Even without projecting light, it is possible to produce an effect using a shadow area by utilizing the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface. The effect using the shadow area is, for example, a hidden video effect in which an image indicating the degree of expectation is hidden by projecting image light indicating the degree of expectation of the gaming state from the projector 213 to an area where the shadow area is formed. It can be carried out. Then, if the rattle effect is performed while performing the hidden image effect, it is possible to perform an effect in which an image showing the degree of expectation can be seen or not visible, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In the present invention, the terms “projection area” and “projection plane” are both used, but the terms “projection area” and “projection plane” are both used in two dimensions and three dimensions. It is for distinguishing. That is, one is a two-dimensional concept and the other is a three-dimensional concept including a three-dimensional shape. Here, the “projection area” may be two-dimensional and the “projection plane” may be three-dimensional, or the “projection area” may be three-dimensional and the “projection plane” may be two-dimensional. For example, if the “projection area” is “a three-dimensional shape onto which image light projected from the projector 213 is projected”, the “projection plane” is “when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed in front view”. 2D image ". If the “projection area” is “a two-dimensional image when the image projected from the projector 213 is viewed from the front”, the “projection plane” is a solid on which the image projected from the projector 213 is projected. Shape ".

FIG. 56A is a diagram showing an example of an image projected on the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and FIG. 56B is a third screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an image projected on the projection surface 7161 of the member 716. FIG.

  In FIG. 56A, since the projection surface 7141 is concave, an image with a sense of depth is projected on the projection surface 7141. In FIG. 56B, the book is shaped as a three-dimensional object, and the image projected as if the page of the book is turned by the image projected from the projector 213 produces a highly realistic effect. It can be performed.

  Even when any projection plane including the projection plane 7123 faces the front, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, any one of the projection planes (projection planes 7123, 7141, 7167) of the movable screen unit 700 is displayed. ) And the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane. Here, the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 is variable by rotating the movable screen unit 700 as described above. On the other hand, the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is a projection surface that can always be projected without being activated. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 forms one projection plane by both the projection plane of the movable screen unit 700 (any one of the projection planes 7123, 7141, and 7167) and the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708. However, it is possible to execute an effect of changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 in a state where the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is fixed.

  For example, the sub-control board 72 projects an information image not related to the result of the internal lottery, such as credit data or BET number display, onto the lower screen 7082, and produces an effect image corresponding to the result of the internal lottery on the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700. Projection can be performed on any one of the projection surfaces 7123, 7141, and 7167. In addition, the sub control board 72 may perform, for example, navigation display in the pressing order of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R (for example, see FIG. 2) in the undulating portion of the lower screen 7082 that functions as a fixed screen. In this way, by using the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082 functioning as a fixed screen, the information image is always projected while changing the projected image as the game progresses. can do. For example, in the case of a liquid crystal display, since it does not rotate like the movable screen unit 700 of this embodiment, it is possible to always display an information image by display control. However, it is difficult to maintain the information image in an easy-to-view manner when the projection screen moves and changes like the movable screen unit 700 as in the present embodiment. In this regard, as in the present embodiment, the projection screen of the movable screen unit 700 and the projection screen of both the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 form one projection plane, but the lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708 is formed. By changing only the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 in a state where is fixed, it is possible to maintain the information image in an easily viewable manner while changing the effect image.

  An effect image corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082, while an information image not related to the result of the internal lottery is projected only on the lower screen 7082. Alternatively, both the effect image according to the result of the internal lottery and the information image not related to the result of the internal lottery may be projected on both the projection surface of the movable screen unit 700 and the lower screen 7082. .

<Front panel>
FIG. 57 is a front view of the front panel 500 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 58 is a perspective view as seen from the upper right side. As shown in FIGS. 57 and X + 1, the front panel 500 includes a display device cover 30 on the front side of the front panel 500. A unit 900 is provided.

  The configuration of the front effect unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view of the front effect unit 900. FIG. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the front effect unit 900. FIG.

  The front effect unit 900 includes a left light effect unit 900L, a right light effect unit 900R, and a bottom plate 904. The bottom plate 904 has a plate shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is arranged so that the top and bottom surfaces are flat. On both ends of the bottom plate 904 in the longitudinal direction, a left side light effect unit 900L and a right side light effect unit 900R are respectively erected substantially vertically upward.

  Also, a left mounting member 905L is fixed to the upper end of the left light effect unit 900L, and a right mounting member 905R is fixed to the upper end of the right light effect unit 900R. A cover 906 is attached to the bottom plate 904 from below.

  In this way, the front effect unit 900 is configured as a substantially U-shape, and the opening 10a (for example, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 61). 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG.

(1) Right Light Effect Unit The configuration of the right light effect unit 900R will be described with reference to FIGS. The left light effect unit 900L and the right light effect unit 900R have substantially the same configuration, although there are differences in the number of light guide plates. Here, the right light effect unit 900R will be described in detail, and the left light effect unit 900L. Will be briefly described later. 62 and 63 are exploded perspective views of the right light effect unit 900R, and the viewing direction is different between FIG. 62 and FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view of the right light effect unit 900R. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate 911, the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED substrate 922 (all of which will be described later). 66 is an exploded perspective view of the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate cover 936, and the light guide plate 911. FIG. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. FIG. 68 is a perspective view showing a state where the LED substrate 922 and the right light guide plate subunit 910R are assembled. FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the right light effect unit 900R as seen from the direction of the arrow 990 in FIG.

  The right light effect unit 900R realizes a predetermined light effect on the right side when viewed from the front of the front panel 500 (for example, see FIG. 57). The right light effect unit 900R includes an LED substrate 922 on which a large number of LEDs 921 are arranged and a lens 928 described later. A right lens subunit 912R in which a light emission effect is performed, and a right light guide plate subunit 910R in which a light emission effect by a light guide plate 911 described later is performed.

  In the right light effect unit 900R, when the right light guide plate subunit 910R is inclined with respect to the right lens subunit 912R and viewed from the player's line of sight, the right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens subunit 912R overlap. (See, for example, FIGS. 61 and 67). In addition, since the right light guide plate subunit 910R is disposed on the player side, the right lens subunit 912R is visible behind the right light guide plate subunit 910R.

  The right light guide plate subunit 910R and the right lens subunit 912R are unitized by using the same LED substrate 922.

(1-1) LED board As shown in FIGS. 62 and 65 to 69, for example, the LED board 922 has a rectangular shape, and the LEDs arranged on the LED board 922 face the front of the pachislot machine. Be placed. That is, the LED substrate 922 is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are disposed is along a two-dimensional surface including the left-right direction and the up-down direction in front view (facing in front view).

  The LED substrate 922 is provided with a large number of LEDs 921 arranged on the surface for each system (details will be described later). The LED substrate 922 is accommodated in an LED substrate cover 920 that covers the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the LED substrate 922 has LEDs 921 arranged to guide light to the right lens subunit 912R in the right region 9222 from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front to about 2/3. An LED 921 that guides light to the right light guide plate subunit 910R is disposed in the left region 9224. The right region 9222 has LED rows of a first row 923A, a second row 923B, and a third row 923C from the right side to the left side in a front view, and the left region 9224 has a left side from the right side in a front view. The LED rows of the fourth row 923D, the fifth row 923E, and the sixth row 923F are provided.

(1-2) Right Lens Subunit As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the right lens subunit 912R includes three light guide lenses 924 (right column) that conduct light from the LEDs 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922. The light guide lens 924A, the middle row light guide lens 924B, and the left row light guide lens 924C) and the light guide lenses 924A and 924B so as to suppress leakage of light conducted through the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C. , 924C, a light guide lens reflector 926, and a lens 928 in which three lenses 928A, 928B, 928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and a hollow cylinder are adjacently arranged in parallel in a stepped manner are inserted therethrough. And a lens base 930 for supporting.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the three light guide lenses 924 are arranged such that the right column light guide lens 924A faces the LEDs 921 arranged in the first column 923A of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, a small column body 925A described later is provided). LED 921 is opposed), middle row light guide lens 924B is opposed to LED 921 arranged in second row 923B of LED substrate 922 (more specifically, small column body 925B described later is opposed to LED 921), and left column light guide The lenses 924 </ b> C are arranged so as to face the LEDs 921 arranged in the first row 923 </ b> A (FIG. 64) of the LED substrate 922 (more specifically, a small column body 925 </ b> C described later faces the LEDs 921).

  The right column light guide lens 924A has a plurality of columnar small columns 925A extending toward the LED substrate 922 along the longitudinal direction, and the middle column light guide lens 924B extends toward the LED substrate 922. A plurality of columnar small columnar bodies 925B are formed along the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of columnar small columnar bodies 925C extending toward the LED substrate 922 are formed along the longitudinal direction on the left column light guide lens 924C. . Here, since the lens 928 has three lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C arranged adjacent to each other in a staircase shape, the shortest length (horizontal) from each small columnar body 925A, 925B, and 925C to the LED substrate 922 is horizontal. The length in the direction, hereinafter simply referred to as “length”) varies depending on each lens 928.

  For example, in the right column light guide lens 924A arranged corresponding to the right column lens 928A farthest from the LED substrate 922, the length of the small column body 925A is the small column body 925B of the other light guide lenses 924B and 924C. , 925C, the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the small column body 925A and can be guided to the back of the right column lens 928A. Further, the left column light guide lens 924C arranged corresponding to the left column lens 928C closest to the LED substrate 922 has a small column body 925C having a small column body 925A, 925B of the other light guide lenses 924A, 924B. It is smaller, and the light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the small column body 925C and guided to the vicinity of the back surface of the left column lens 928C. Further, in the middle row light guide lens 924B arranged corresponding to the middle row lens 928B, the length of the small column body 925B is smaller than that of the right row light guide lens 924A but larger than that of the left row light guide lens 924C. The light from the LED 921 can be conducted to the small column body 925C and guided to the vicinity of the back surface of the middle row lens 928B.

  The light from the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 is emitted from each of the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C through the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C, and as shown in FIG. 928A emits light at the position farthest from the LED board 922 (frontmost position), the left column lens 928C emits light at the position closest to the LED board 922 (most rearward position), and the middle row lens 928B is in the middle. It emits light at the position.

  By the way, although the light emission position of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C can be changed by arranging a plurality of lenses 928 in a stepwise manner, there is a possibility that the light emission intensity may vary. That is, although light is supplied to the lens 928 from the LED substrate 922, light is attenuated according to the distance from the LED substrate 922 to the lens 928, and thus the right column having the longest length from the LED substrate 922 is used. There is a possibility that the light emission amount of the lens 928A decreases, and the light emission intensity between the lenses 928 may be unbalanced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C are interposed between the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C and the LED substrate 922 so that the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C are LEDs. The light emitted from the LED 921 arranged on the substrate 922 is taken in, guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each lens 928A, 928B, 928C and emitted. In this manner, the light emitted from the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 is guided to the vicinity of the back surface of each of the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C while suppressing light attenuation by the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C. Thus, even if the light emission position of the lens 928 is far from the LED 922 substrate, the light emission intensity is not lowered. As a result, it is possible to emit light with substantially uniform emission intensity at a position where the length from the LED substrate 922 is different, even though the light source is a single LED substrate 922. .

  As shown in FIG. 62, the light guide lens reflector 926 includes a right row light guide lens 924A, a middle row light guide lens 924B, and a left row light guide lens 924C arranged in this order from the right side surface of the LED substrate 922. Each light guide lens is accommodated so as to be opposed to the LED substrate 922.

  The lens base 930 is fixed so that the lens 928 covers the light guide lens reflector 926. The lens base 930 has the end surfaces of the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C in the vicinity of the back surfaces of the lenses 928A, 928B, and 928C, with the light guide lenses 924A, 924B, and 924C facing the LED substrate 922. I am doing so. Each lens 928A, 928B, 928C is engraved with a pattern as if a plurality of sine waves overlapped, and when the LED 921 emits light, the pattern corresponding to the emission color can be viewed through the light guide plate 911. it can.

(1-3) Right Light Guide Plate Subunit As shown in FIGS. 65 and 67, the right light guide plate subunit 910R includes a plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C stacked on each other. The right light guide plate subunit 910R has the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, when viewed from the front of the pachislot with the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 facing the LED substrate 922 facing each other. The flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are placed on the LED substrate 922 from the rear to the front so that the light plates 911A, 911B, and 911C and the lens 928 can be seen to overlap each other. It is inclined and arranged in a direction that spreads outward (right side of the front view).

  Thus, by inclining the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 with respect to the LED substrate 922, the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 use the same LED substrate 922 as a light source, and the light guide plate The lens 928 can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the 911 so that a mixed effect of the light guide plates 911A, 911B and 911C and the lens 928 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922. However, the light source is not LEDs but diffuses light as compared to LEDs such as lamps. In the case of a light source, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 may be inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. Further, even if the light source is an LED, when the LEDs are arranged with an inclination with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable that the plurality of LEDs are inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional plane on which the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 921, but is taken in from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side (input) It is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the light.

  In addition, the light guide plate 911 forms irregularities on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc., and transmits light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side along the surface. By doing so (for example, when the LED 921 is turned on), the predetermined shape, pattern, character, and the like appear on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. In the present embodiment, a specific portion of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 is subjected to a non-transparent process in which a non-transparent material (for example, a silver metal foil) is deposited by hot stamping, for example. ing. Thereby, when the LED 921 disposed opposite to the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 is turned on, the non-transparent region where the hot stamping foil exists is three-dimensional by the light transmission region around it. And the aspect which stood out conspicuously can be created.

  “When the LED 921 is turned on, the predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. appear on each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3” means that each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 is normal (for example, when the LED 921 is extinguished). Is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 at a specific time (for example, when the LED 921 is turned on). For example, even during normal times, the predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized by the incident light of disturbance light, and the predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized at a specific time. An aspect of being able to do so is also included.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like is formed on each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a transparent paint, a transparent member, etc. However, it is possible that the image can be visually recognized at a specific time.

  In addition, “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display. However, in this specification, an image displayed indirectly or directly by a light source such as an LED may be used. This is called “image”. Accordingly, by transmitting light from the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 along the surface, predetermined shapes, patterns, characters, and the like appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 are also included in the image. It is.

  In this embodiment, the non-permeable treatment is performed using the hot stamping foil. Instead, for example, when a thin colored metal is vapor-deposited, the portion where the metal is vapor-deposited By transmitting the light, it is also possible to configure so that the light of the LED that transmits the metal and the light that transmits the light guide plate 911 exist in the light transmission region.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 65, the light guide plate cover 936 accommodates three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, and the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the respective light guide plates 911 are LED substrates. 922. The side surface 911A1 on the proximal end side of the first light guide plate 911A is opposed to the fourth row 923D of the LED substrate 922, the side surface 911B1 on the proximal end side of the second light guide plate 911B is opposed to the fifth row 923E, and the third side. The side surface 911C1 on the proximal end side of the light guide plate 911C faces the sixth row 923F. In this way, the plurality of light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are overlapped with each other, and are directed from the base end side of each light guide plate 911A, 911B, 911C to the other end side (hereinafter referred to as “non-base end side”). By tilting away from the LED board 922, when the LED 921 arranged on the LED board 922 is turned on, the pattern appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C It will be visually recognized from the viewpoint with parallax (deviation), and a stereoscopic effect can be achieved.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A has a first circular hole 9112A on the upper end side and the base end side, and a second circular opening on the upper end side and the base end side. The hole 9114A is formed with a third circular opening 9116A on the lower end side and the base end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118A on the lower end and the base end side. The flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B has a first circular hole 9112B on the upper end side and the base end side, a second circular hole 9114B on the upper end side and the base end side, and a lower end side and a base side. A third circular opening 9116B is formed on the end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118B is formed on the lower end and the base end side. Similarly, the flat surface 911C3 of the third light guide plate 911C has a first circular hole 9112C on the upper end side and the base end side, a second circular hole 9114C on the upper end side and the base end side, and a lower end side and A third circular opening 9116C is formed on the base end side, and a fourth circular opening 9118C is formed on the lower end and the base end side.

  Further, locking members (upper locking members 938, 911) that connect the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C with the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 facing each other at the upper end and the lower end of the light guide plate cover 936, respectively. A lower locking member 940) is attached. The upper locking member 938 is formed with a protruding member 9382 on the proximal end side and a protruding member 9384 on the opposite proximal side, and the lower locking member 930 has a protruding member 9402 on the proximal end side and an opposite proximal side. The protruding member 9404 is formed.

  Then, a base-side protruding member 9382 formed in the upper locking member 938 passes through each first circular hole 9112A, 9112B, 9112C, and a non-base-side protruding member formed in the upper locking member 938. The 9384 passes through the second circular holes 9114A, 9114B, 9114C, so that the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the upper end. Similarly, the base end side projection member 9402 formed in the lower locking member 940 passes through each third circular hole 9116A, 9116B, 9116C, and the base end side projection formed in the lower locking member 940 is formed. The member 9404 passes through the fourth circular holes 9118A, 9118B, 9118C, so that the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are connected at the lower end. The three light guide plates 911 </ b> A, 911 </ b> B, and 911 </ b> C connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 936. When connecting the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, a decorative cover 942 that functions as a decorative plate of the right light effect unit 900R is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 911.

  Note that the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 have substantially the same length regardless of whether they are on the base end side or the non-base end side. Thus, by making the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 penetrating the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C substantially the same, the distance between the light guide plates (the horizontal length to the opposing light guide plates) is increased. Regardless, it can be kept within a certain length range. However, the protruding members 9382, 9384, 9402, and 9404 do not necessarily have substantially the same length. For example, the length of the protruding member 9382 on the proximal end side and the length of the protruding member 9384 on the opposite proximal side are different. Alternatively, similarly, the length of the protruding member 9402 on the proximal end side may be different from the length of the protruding member 9404 on the opposite proximal side.

  The upper and lower ends of the light guide plate cover 936 are connected to the lens base 930 by cover mounting members 932 and 934 (see, for example, FIG. 62), and the light guide plate 911 and the lens 928 are integrated to face the LED substrate 922. Be placed.

  By the way, if each side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 911 is perpendicular to each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911, the LED 921 and the light guide plate 911 arranged on the LED substrate 922 are used. A predetermined angle is generated between the base end side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1, and light from the LED 921 cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate 911.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are cut so that a surface facing the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 is formed. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 921 is configured to be incident substantially perpendicular to the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side.

  By the way, if the light incident on each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is diffused without going straight, there is a problem that the image that should appear on each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 does not appear clearly. May occur. In this regard, in the present embodiment, each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 is cut so that a surface facing the LED 921 is formed. Thereby, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be increased, and the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 922, and the light guide plates 911 are flat. It becomes possible to make an image appear clearly on the surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 69, on the side opposite to the LED substrate 922 side, an open area is formed between the lens 928 and the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C. 980 is formed. In this open area 980, various light effects can be performed.

  The inner walls (reflection members) 914L and 914R (for example, see FIGS. 57 and 58) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 are inclined in the same direction as the inclination direction of the light guide plate on the front side of the LED substrate 922. It is possible to function as a reflective surface that has been mirror-finished. That is, when the light emitted from the LED 921 disposed on the LED substrate 922 enters the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 of the light guide plate 911, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are applied in advance. An image such as a pattern or text appears. Thus, the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 are reflected by the inner wall 914R functioning as a reflecting surface and reach the player's visual field. A part of the light emitted from the lens 928 is similarly reflected and reaches the player's visual field. In this case, the player visually recognizes the light emitted from the lens 928 and / or the image directly reflected on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 and the image reflected by the inner wall 914R. Combined with this, it is possible to make the effect that the light image is doubled.

  In addition, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are not flat with respect to the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. The surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 are cut so that the angle formed between the surfaces (player side surfaces) of the surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 67). As described above, since the side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, and 911C1 on the base end side are also cut, a cross section that can be seen when these light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are cut in the horizontal direction is as shown in FIG. 67, for example. Furthermore, of the front and back surfaces of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3, a trapezoid is formed with the back surface (surface on the lens 928 side) as the upper base and the front surface (player side surface) as the lower base.

  In this way, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on the opposite base side are between the front surfaces (the player side surfaces) of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. By making the cut so that the angle formed by is an acute angle, the light emission from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 911 can be made difficult to see from the player side (player) From the side, it can be recognized only as a line along the opposite end of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911), and the player's consciousness is the flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. The image that appears can be watched. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a gaming party of the pachislot, the pachislot is expected to be in an advantageous state, for example, using light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 of the light guide plate 911. It is possible to appeal that the state is high. In particular, when the plurality of light guide plates 911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base end side are substantially flush with each other, the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C on the opposite base end side. Since the thickness of each of the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 is increased and thick light is emitted, it is possible to strongly appeal to the third party. In addition, since the light emitted from the lens 928 can be visually recognized also in the open region 980, the effect is great. In particular, in a gaming machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting image light projected from the projector 213, if the vicinity of the screen is brightened, the projected image becomes blurred, so the vicinity of the screen needs to be dark. In such a case, it is difficult to provide a light emitting means in the vicinity of the screen, and the appeal to third parties tends to be weakened, so the effect is remarkable.

  In addition, when a plurality of light guide plates are arranged in a stacked manner as in the present embodiment, the end portion of each light guide plate opposite to the base end side is cut at the same angle so that the end portion is visually recognized. Although it is preferable in that the appeal to a third party that can be strengthened, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case where a light guide plate cut at one angle and a light guide plate cut at another angle are arranged in an overlapping manner, the person who is in a range where the end of the light guide plate cut at one angle can be visually recognized And it can appeal to both those who are in the range which can visually recognize the edge part of the light-guide plate cut at other angles, and the range which can appeal to a third party becomes wide.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the front surface (the player side) of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. However, instead of this, it may be cut so as to be an obtuse angle. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 911 can be viewed from the player side, and the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Together with this, it becomes possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest of the player.

  In addition, the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 911 can be arbitrarily determined, but if the emission color is a warm color or rainbow color, The player's interest can be further enhanced.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65, among the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the third light guide plate 911C has the LEDs 921 arranged in the sixth row 923F on the side surface 911A1 on the base end side. A light guide protrusion 956 for receiving light from the light is provided. The protruding body 956 has a comb shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs in the sixth row 923F.

  As shown in FIG. 68, each of the light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is housed in the light guide plate cover 936, and the LED board so that the protruding body 956 and the LED 921 arranged on the LED board 922 face each other. 922. The light guide plate cover 936 is provided with a partition wall 937 that partitions the protrusions 956, and the partition wall 937 prevents light emitted from the LEDs 921 facing the adjacent protrusions 956. It has a function. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light entering from the protrusions 956 of the third light guide plate 911 </ b> C from being mixed with each other between the plurality of LEDs 921. Furthermore, since the light guide plate projection 956 and the light guide plate 911C are integrally formed, the light incident area (for example, the light guide plate (for example, compared with a separate light guide plate such as a diffusion lens), for example, 66 can be reduced, and the effect area of the light guide plate 911C (for example, the area β shown in FIG. 66) can be increased accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 67, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are arranged in an overlapping manner, a space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is set to the base end side (LED substrate). 922 side) and is gradually narrowed toward the opposite base end side (the side opposite to the LED substrate 922).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, the first circle on the surface (player side) facing the second light guide plate 911B of the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A. The first rib 9113A, the second rib 9115A, the peripheral edge of the opening 9112A, the peripheral edge of the second circular opening 9114A, the peripheral edge of the third circular opening 9116A, and the peripheral edge of the fourth circular opening 9118A, respectively. A third rib 9117A and a fourth rib 9119A are provided. Each of these ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, and 9119A has an inclined surface that inclines downward from the base end side toward the opposite base end side (see, for example, FIG. 67).

  Similarly, on the surface opposite to the third light guide plate 911C (player side) of the front and back surfaces of the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B, the peripheral portion of the first circular opening 9112B, the second circle A first rib 9113B, a second rib 9115B, a third rib 9117B, and a fourth rib 9119B are provided on the periphery of the opening 9114B, the periphery of the third circular opening 9116B, and the periphery of the fourth circular opening 9118B, respectively. Is provided. Each of these ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, and 9119B has an inclined surface that inclines downward from the base end side toward the opposite base end side (see, for example, FIG. 67).

  When connecting the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C, the ribs 9113A, 9115A, 9117A, 9119A provided on the first light guide plate 911A are flat surfaces 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B facing each other. Abut. Similarly, the ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, and 9119B provided on the second light guide plate 911B are in contact with the flat surface 911C3 of the third light guide plate 911C facing each other. In this way, when the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the flat surfaces of the light guide plates facing each other with the ribs in contact with each other and fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the flat surfaces of the light guide plates are fixed to each other. The space is the widest on the base end side and gradually decreases toward the opposite base end side.

  In this manner, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate the widest on the base end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 921 arranged in adjacent rows from entering. For example, the light emitted from the LEDs 921 arranged in the fourth row 923D enters the side surface 911A1 on the proximal end side of the first light guide plate 911A, and is arranged, for example, in the third row 923C or the fifth row 923E. Further, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 921 from entering. In addition, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the non-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to third parties can be increased. it can. Furthermore, since the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C are connected to the light guide plates facing each other with the ribs in contact with each other and then fixed to the light guide plate cover 936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is improved. The effect is also excellent.

  The space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is widest on the base end side (LED substrate 922 side) and on the opposite base end side (opposite side of the LED substrate 922). The mode of gradually narrowing toward the base is not limited to the above mode in which a rib having an inclined surface that slopes downward from the base end side toward the non-base end side is provided. For example, a boss on the base end side and a boss on the non-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911A3 of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B. The height of the boss on the end side (the shortest distance to the flat surface of the opposing second light guide plate 911B) may be increased. Similarly, a boss on the base end side and a boss on the non-base end side are provided on the flat surface 911B3 of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C, and more than the boss on the anti-base end side. You may make it the height of the boss | hub of the base end side become large. Of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the flat surface of the first light guide plate 911A on the side facing the second light guide plate 911B is inclined downward from the base end side toward the opposite base end side. A rib having an inclined surface is provided, and the flat surface of the second light guide plate 911B on the side facing the third light guide plate 911C is smaller in height than the base end boss and the base end boss. A boss on the opposite base end side may be provided.

(2) Left Light Effect Unit The left light effect unit 900L will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 70 is a front view of the left light effect unit 900L, FIG. 71 is a sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 70, and FIG. 72 is a light guide plate 1911, a light guide plate cover 1936, and an LED substrate 1922 (all of which are shown). FIG.

  As described above, the configuration of the left light effect unit 900L is substantially the same as that of the right light effect unit 900R, and will be briefly described here.

  The left light effect unit 900L realizes a predetermined light effect together with the right light effect unit 900R on the left side when viewed from the front of the front panel 500 (for example, see FIG. 57), and an LED substrate 1922 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged. And a left lens subunit 912L in which a light emission effect is performed via the lens 1928, and a left light guide plate subunit 910L in which a light emission effect by a light guide plate 1911 described later is performed.

(2-1) LED board The LED board 1922 has a rectangular shape like the LED board 922, and the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1922 are arranged to face the front of the pachislot machine. That is, the LED substrate 1922 is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are disposed is along a two-dimensional surface including the left and right direction and the up and down direction in front view (facing in front view).

  The LED substrate 1922 is provided with a large number of LEDs arranged on the surface thereof for each system. The LED substrate 1922 is housed in an LED substrate cover (not shown) that covers the back side.

  The LED board 1922 has LED rows in which LEDs (not shown) are arranged in the vertical direction, like the LED board 922, but the number of rows is one less than the LED board 922. . This is because the number of light guide plates 1911 described later is one less.

  In addition, about the other structure of LED board 1922, it is substantially the same as LED board 922, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

(2-2) Left Lens Subunit The left lens subunit 912L includes three light guide lenses 1924 (left row light guide lens 1924A and middle row light guide lens 1924B) that conduct light from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922. , Right column light guide lens 1924C) and a light guide lens reflector 1926 that can accommodate each light guide lens 1924A, 1924B, 1924C so that light leakage through the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C is suppressed. A lens 1928 in which three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C having a substantially semicircular cross section and a hollow cylinder are adjacently arranged side by side and integrated in a stepwise manner, and a lens base 1930 that inserts and supports them. .

  All of the three light guide lenses 1924 are arranged so as to face the LEDs arranged in the LED row of the LED substrate 1922.

  Each column light guide lens 1924A, 1924B, 1924C is formed with a plurality of columnar small columns (not shown) extending toward the LED substrate 1922 along the longitudinal direction. Here, since the lens 1928 is composed of three lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C that are adjacently arranged in a staircase shape, the shortest length from each small column to the LED substrate 1922 (the length in the horizontal direction). Hereinafter, it is simply referred to as “length”) depending on each lens 1928. Note that these small pillars can guide the light from the LED 1921 to the respective small pillars up to the back of each lens 1928.

  The light from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 is conducted through the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, 1924C and emitted from the lenses 1928A, 1928B, 1928C, so the left column lens 1928A is farthest from the LED substrate 1922. The right row lens 1928C emits light at a position closest to the LED substrate 1922 (the rearmost position), and the middle row lens 1928B emits light at an intermediate position. .

  As with the right lens subunit 912R, the light emitted from the LEDs disposed on the LED substrate 1922 is transmitted to the respective lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C while suppressing light attenuation by the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C. By guiding to the vicinity of the back surface, the light emission intensity is not lowered even if the light emission position of the lens 1928 is away from the LED substrate. As a result, it is possible to emit light with substantially uniform emission intensity at a position where the length from the LED substrate 1922 is different, although the light source is a single LED substrate.

  The light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C are also accommodated in the light guide lens reflector 1926.

  The lens base 1930 is fixed so that the lens 1928 covers the light guide lens reflector 1926. The lens base 1930 has the end faces of the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C in the vicinity of the back surfaces of the lenses 1928A, 1928B, and 1928C, with the light guide lenses 1924A, 1924B, and 1924C facing the LED substrate 1922. I am doing so. Each lens 1928A, 1928B, 1928C is engraved with a pattern as if multiple sine waves overlapped, and when the LED emits light, the pattern according to the emission color can be seen through the light guide plate 1911. it can.

(2-3) Left Light Guide Plate Subunit The left light guide plate subunit 910L includes a plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B stacked on each other. The left light guide plate subunit 910L has the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B when viewed from the front of the pachislot with the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B facing the LED substrate 1922, respectively. The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are spread from the rear to the front toward the outside of the pachislot (on the left side in the front view) so that the lens 1928 and the lens 1928 overlap. It is inclined.

  Thus, by inclining each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 with respect to the LED substrate 1922, the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 use the same LED substrate 1922 as a light source, while the light guide plate 1911 The lens 1928 can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3, and a mixed effect of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B and the lens 1928 is provided.

  The flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are also inclined with respect to the LED substrate 1922. However, when the light source is not an LED but a light source that diffuses light compared to an LED, such as a lamp. The flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3, and 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 are preferably inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional surface where the light of each lamp is most concentrated in a plurality of lamps. In addition, even if the light source is an LED, if the LEDs are inclined with respect to the LED substrate, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are not inclined with respect to the LED substrate. Instead, it is preferable that the plurality of LEDs are inclined with respect to a virtual two-dimensional plane on which the light of each LED is most concentrated. However, although the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LEDs, the light taken in (entered) from the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side Is substantially parallel to the traveling direction.

  In addition, the light guide plate 1911 forms irregularities in a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, and transmits light from the end along the surface, for example, when the LED is lit, A predetermined engraved shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3. In the present embodiment, a non-permeable process is performed in which a specific part of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 is vapor-deposited, for example, by hot stamping. . Thereby, when the LEDs disposed opposite to the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side of the light guide plate 1911 are turned on, the non-transparent region where the hot stamping foil is present is three-dimensional by the surrounding light transmission region, and An aspect that stands out can be created.

  In addition, “when the LED is turned on, a predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. engraved on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3, 1911C3” means that each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 is normal (for example, when the LED is turned off). Nothing appears, and the present invention is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like appears on each flat surface 1911A3, 1911B3 at a specific time (for example, when an LED is lit). For example, even when it is normal, the engraved predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. can be visually recognized by the incident light of disturbance light, and at the specified time, the engraved predetermined shape, pattern, character, etc. are clearer A mode in which the user can visually recognize the image is also included.

  In this embodiment, a predetermined shape, pattern, character, or the like is engraved on each light guide plate 1911. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an image is usually formed by using a transparent paint or a transparent member. Although the time is substantially invisible, the image may be visible at a specific time.

  Further, the shape, pattern, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are different from the shape, pattern, characters, etc. formed on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911. Therefore, when the LED is turned on, different images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are the same motif as the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

  However, the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 when the LED is lit may be the same as the images appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3 and 911C3 of the light guide plate 911.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a specific portion of each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 of the light guide plate 911 and the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 is formed by a non-transparent material (for example, silver color) by hot stamping, for example. However, it is not always necessary to perform the non-permeable treatment on the flat surfaces of all the light guide plates, and only the flat surfaces of some of the light guide plates are non-permeable. Transparency processing may be performed.

  The light guide plate cover 1936 accommodates two light guide plates 1911 </ b> A and 1911 </ b> B, and the side surfaces 1911 </ b> A <b> 1 and 1911 </ b> B <b> 1 of each light guide plate 1911 are opposed to the LED substrate 1922. In addition, the plurality of light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 1922 from the base end side to the opposite base end side of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B while overlapping each other. When the LEDs arranged in the LED are turned on, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the respective light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are visually recognized with a parallax (shift) from the player's viewpoint, and a stereoscopic effect is produced. It becomes possible.

  Further, the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are circular on the upper end side and the base end side, the upper end side and the anti-base end side, the lower end side and the base end side, the lower end and the anti-base end side, respectively. Openings 19112A, 19114A, 19116A, 19118A, 19112B, 19114B, 19116B, 19118B are formed.

  Then, a plurality of projecting members (not shown) formed on the upper locking member 1938 pass through the circular holes on the upper end side, so that the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected at the upper end. Similarly, a plurality of projecting members (not shown) formed on the lower upper locking member 1940 pass through the circular holes on the lower end side, thereby connecting the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B at the lower end. The two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B connected in this way are fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936. When connecting the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B, a decorative cover 1942 that functions as a decorative plate of the left light effect unit 900L is also attached to the surface (player) side of the light guide plate 1911.

  In addition, the protrusion member which penetrates each circular aperture of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B has substantially the same length regardless of whether it is the base end side or the non-base end side. In this way, by making the protruding members penetrating the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B substantially the same, it is in a range of a constant length regardless of the distance between the light guide plates (the horizontal length to the opposing light guide plates). Can be suppressed.

  The light guide plate cover 1936 is connected to the lens base 1930 at the upper and lower ends thereof by a cover mounting member (not shown), and the light guide plate 1911 and the lens 1928 are integrally disposed so as to face the LED substrate 1922.

  Further, each of the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B on the base end side of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B is also cut so that a surface facing the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1922 is formed, and thereby light is emitted from the LED. The incident light is incident substantially perpendicularly to the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side, so that the light is sufficiently incident.

  Here, similarly to the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are cut so that the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 face the LEDs. Accordingly, the straightness of the light incident on the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B can be increased, and the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 are inclined while the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are inclined with respect to the LED substrate 1922. It is possible to make the image appear clearly on the screen.

  In addition, an open region 1980 is formed between the lens 1928 and the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on the side opposite to the LED substrate 1922 side. In the open area 1980, various light effects can be performed.

  As described above, the inner walls (reflecting members) 914L and 914R (see, for example, FIGS. 57 and 58) of the side covers 903L and 903R of the front panel 500 are in front of the LED substrate 1922 and the inclination direction of the light guide plate. Inclined in the same direction. When light emitted from the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1922 enters the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 of the light guide plate 1911, patterns and characters previously applied to the flat surfaces 1911A3, 1911B3 and 1911C3 of the light guide plate 1911 are displayed. An image such as appears. The images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 as described above are reflected by the inner wall 914L functioning as a reflecting surface and reach the player's visual field. A part of the light emitted from the lens 1928 is similarly reflected and reaches the player's visual field. In this case, the player can directly view the light emitted from the lens 1928 and / or the image displayed on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 and the image reflected by the inner wall 914L. In combination with the above, it is possible to make the consciousness of the effect that the light image is doubled.

  Further, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end sides of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are not perpendicular to the respective flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911, but are arranged in a table of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. The back surface is cut so that the angle formed with the front surface (the player side surface) is an acute angle (see, for example, FIG. 71). As described above, since the side surfaces 1911A1 and 1911B1 on the base end side are also cut, the cross section seen when these light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are cut in the horizontal direction is a flat surface as shown in FIG. 71, for example. Of the front and back surfaces of 1911A3 and 1911B3, a trapezoid is formed with the back surface (the surface on the lens 1928 side) as the upper base and the front surface (the player-side surface) as the lower bottom.

  In this way, the angle formed between the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B on the opposite base side and the front surface (the player side surface) of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 is an acute angle. By cutting so that the light emission from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 1911 is difficult to see from the player side (from the player side each of the light guide plate 1911 It is possible to recognize the player's consciousness on the images appearing on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911 only as a linear shape along the opposite end of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. On the other hand, for a third party who is not a gaming party of the pachislot, using the light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 of the light guide plate 1911, the pachislot is in an advantageous state or expected It becomes possible to appeal that it is in a high state. In particular, when the plurality of light guide plates 1911 are brought close to each other so that the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base side are substantially flush, the side surfaces 1911A2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. Since the thickness of 1911B2 is increased and thick light is emitted, it can be strongly appealed to the third party. Further, since the light emission from the lens 1928 can be visually recognized in the open area 1980, the effect is great. Further, in combination with light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2 and 911B2 of the light guide plate 911, it is possible to appeal over a wide range. In particular, in a gaming machine in which an effect image is displayed by projecting video light projected from the projector 213, since the appeal power to a third party tends to be weak, the effect is remarkable.

  In the present embodiment, the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end sides of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are placed between the front surface and the back surface (the player side surface) of the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3. Although the cut is made so that the angle formed is an acute angle, it may be cut so as to be an obtuse angle instead. In this case, the light emission from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base end side of the light guide plate 1911 can be visually recognized from the player side, and is combined with images displayed on the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the light guide plate 1911. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest of the player.

  Further, the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the side opposite to the base end of the light guide plate 1911 can be arbitrarily determined. However, if the emission color is a warm color or rainbow color, the game is further played. Can enhance the interest of the person. Further, the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 911 and the emission color of light emitted from the side surfaces 1911A2 and 1911B2 on the opposite base side of the light guide plate 1911. If, for example, is changed according to the gaming state, various effects can be performed.

  As for the left light guide plate subunit 910L, the side surface 911A1 on the base end side of the third light guide plate 911C has a comb shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs. It does not have the light guide plate made into the comb-tooth shape corresponding to the arrangement pitch. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right light guide plate subunit 910R may have a comb-shaped light guide plate corresponding to the arrangement pitch of the LEDs.

  Further, when the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are arranged in an overlapping manner, the space between one light guide plate and another adjacent light guide plate is widest on the base end side and gradually toward the opposite base end side. To be narrower. In this method, a rib having an inclined surface that inclines downward from the proximal end side toward the opposite proximal end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B. However, bosses having different heights on the base end side and the opposite base end side may be formed between the flat surfaces 1911A3 and 1911B3 of the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B.

  In this way, by making the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate the widest on the base end side, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in adjacent rows from entering. In addition, by narrowing the space between the flat surfaces of the light guide plate on the non-base end side, the light emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate can be thickened, and the appeal to third parties can be increased. it can. Furthermore, since the two light guide plates 1911A and 1911B are connected to the light guide plates facing each other by forming ribs and bosses and then fixed to the light guide plate cover 1936, the stability when transporting the pastillo is also improved. Demonstrate the effect of excellent.

(3) Aspect of the light effect of the light effect unit Next, the light effect effect of the light effect unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. Here, of the right light effect unit 900R and the left light effect unit 900L, the right light effect unit 900R will be described as an example.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an aspect of the right light effect unit 900 when neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R is emitting light. In this case, no pattern appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 in any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C (see, for example, FIG. 65). Therefore, the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

  However, all or at least one of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C is subjected to an impermeable process. In this non-transparent treatment, alphabetic characters / patterns 915 are applied on the upper and lower portions of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3. The portion that has been subjected to the impermeable treatment in this way can be visually recognized regardless of whether or not the light emission effect is being performed because, for example, a silver metal color foil is deposited. Here, a pattern or the like is not visually recognized in the light transmissive region, but the characters and patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transmissive regions can be visually recognized. For this reason, since the surrounding light transmission region is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transparent region appear three-dimensionally and stand out. For this reason, even if neither the right light guide plate subunit 910R nor the right lens subunit 912R has a light emitting effect, a video visual effect can be provided.

  In FIG. 74, when the LEDs 921 arranged on the LED substrate 922 are partially lit, a light emission effect is performed for the right light guide plate subunit 910R and a light emission effect is not performed for the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of right light effect unit 900R. In this case, a pattern related to the pachislot motif appears on each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

  Here, the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, 911C are inclined so as to be separated from the LED substrate 922 from the base end side to the non-base end side of each light guide plate 911A, 911B, 911C while overlapping each other. Therefore, the patterns appearing on the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the respective light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C can be visually recognized with parallax, and a three-dimensional image appears to appear. In FIG. 74, since a triangular pattern 916 is applied to each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3, it is difficult to grasp in the drawing, but the patterns applied to the respective flat surface carrier surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3. 916 is visually recognized with parallax and can feel a three-dimensional effect. In this way, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect, and to enhance the game entertainment.

  FIG. 75 shows that when the LED 921 arranged on the LED board 922 is partially lit, the light guide effect is not performed for the right light guide plate subunit 910R and the light effect is performed for the right lens subunit 912R. It is a figure which shows the aspect of right light effect unit 900R. In this case, in any of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the light transmission region of each flat surface 911A3, 911B3, 911C3 includes any pattern including a triangular pattern 916 (for example, see FIG. 74). Has not appeared. Therefore, the light emission mode of the right lens subunit 912R behind can be visually recognized through the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C.

  However, although a pattern or the like is not visually recognized in the light transmission region of each of the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3 of the three light guide plates 911A, 911B, and 911C, the characters and patterns 915 in the upper and lower non-transparent regions are visually recognized. can do. At this time, since the light transmission area around the area is transparent, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmission area appear three-dimensionally and stand out. In particular, since the light emission effect is performed on the right lens subunit 912R, the characters / patterns 915 in the non-transmissive region can be more visually recognized. In this way, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect, and to enhance the game entertainment.

  In the above embodiment, a pachislot gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine according to the present invention is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. There may be.

<Appendix (Summary of Invention of First Embodiment)>
[First to fourth gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of reading moving image data into a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) and developing the same and displaying a three-dimensional moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal display has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-1990). No. 155438).

  By the way, in recent years, in gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, various effects with high image quality using 3D CG (Computer Graphics) technology have become mainstream. And since the CG data for performing the various productions are created in advance and the created CG data is stored in the CGROM, the cost for creating the CG increases year by year.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to achieve high image quality using the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in the cost associated with CG creation. It is to provide a gaming machine that can execute various productions.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-1 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and non-volatile data storing virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86),
The controller is
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. In this case, first viewpoint image data projected onto the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the virtual object data,
In the virtual space, the second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected onto the virtual object is virtually shot from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data), storing the data of the second viewpoint image in the volatile storage unit;
A gaming machine, wherein data of the second viewpoint image stored in the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal and the video signal is output.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-2 gaming machines]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and a memory storing virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit Part (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit is configured to virtually project a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. Data of a first viewpoint image projected onto the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the virtual object data, and the virtual space is Second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual) acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the object is virtually captured from the second direction (for example, the actual incident direction of video light). A game machine characterized by generating (photographed image data).

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 1-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[1-3 gaming machines]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and a memory storing virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit Part (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit is configured to virtually project a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. Data of a first viewpoint image projected onto the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the virtual object data, and the virtual space is Second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual) acquired when the first viewpoint image projected on the object is virtually captured from the second direction (for example, the actual incident direction of video light). Shooting image data)
The first direction is a player's eye direction with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit
The gaming machine, wherein the second direction is an incident direction of the video light with respect to a display surface of the image of the display unit.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-1 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and non-volatile data storing virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86),
The controller is
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) onto the virtual object arranged in a virtual space. In this case, data of a first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the data of the virtual object, and the first viewpoint image is generated. Storing the viewpoint image data in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
In the virtual space, the second viewpoint acquired when the first viewpoint image projected onto the virtual object is virtually shot from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light). Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data), storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer storing the data of the second viewpoint image to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. A game machine that converts data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) stored in the third buffer into a video signal and outputs the video signal.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-2 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and non-volatile data storing virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit Sex storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit uses the volatile storage unit to correspond to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) to the virtual object arranged in the virtual space. Data of a first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) when a video is virtually projected is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the virtual object data Then, the first viewpoint image data is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the first projected on the virtual object in the virtual space. Generates second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) acquired when the viewpoint image is virtually photographed from the second direction (for example, the actual incident direction of video light) Te, stores data of the second view image in a second buffer of the volatile storage unit (e.g., a frame buffer),
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer storing the data of the second viewpoint image to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , Converting the data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) into a video signal, and outputting the video signal;
The gaming machine, wherein the size of the third buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the size of the second buffer is larger than the size of the third buffer.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 2-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[2-3 gaming machines]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and non-volatile data storing virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the display unit Sex storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects data of the virtual object,
The image processing unit uses the volatile storage unit to correspond to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) to the virtual object arranged in the virtual space. Data of a first viewpoint image projected on the virtual object (for example, virtual projection image data) when a video is virtually projected is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the virtual object data Then, the first viewpoint image data is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the first projected on the virtual object in the virtual space. Generates second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data) acquired when the viewpoint image is virtually photographed from the second direction (for example, the actual incident direction of video light) The second viewpoint image data is stored in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the image data displayed on the display unit is stored in the second viewpoint image. The data stored in the third buffer is transferred to the third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the data (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is stored. ) Is converted into a video signal, and the video signal is output. The first direction is a player's line-of-sight direction with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit, and the second direction is the display. It is the incident direction of the said image light with respect to the display surface of the said image of a part. The gaming machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 3-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[3-1 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A control unit (for example, sub control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit And a non-volatile storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which texture information (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit is stored,
The controller is
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects the texture information,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data, the predetermined original image data and the texture information Based on
A gaming machine, wherein the pseudo three-dimensional image data generated by the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal and the converted video signal is output.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a No. 3-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 3-2 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and a storage unit (for example, texture data) related to the structure of the display unit (for example, texture data) , ROM cartridge substrate 86),
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and selects the texture information,
The image processing unit
Pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected on the predetermined original image data is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the texture information. Gaming machine.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 3-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[3-3th gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit;
Non-volatile storage unit storing a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and texture information (for example, texture data) regarding the structure of the display unit (For example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86);
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects the texture information,
The image processing unit
Generating pseudo three-dimensional image data (for example, image data after mapping) in which the texture information is reflected in the predetermined original image data based on the predetermined original image data and the texture information; Store in a predetermined buffer (for example, frame buffer) of the storage unit,
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the predetermined buffer in which the pseudo three-dimensional image data is stored to a specific buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit, and the specific data Data stored in the buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) is converted into a video signal, the video signal is output, and the size of the specific buffer is the same as the size of the image, and the predetermined buffer The gaming machine is larger than the specific buffer.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-1 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit;
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double angle-of-view data including resource image data), and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual A non-volatile storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which object data or texture data) is stored,
The controller is
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the nonvolatile storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit,
The image processing unit
From image data obtained by performing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data based on information for displaying the image on the display unit, using a specific conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix Pe), the Extracting the image data displayed by the display unit, converting the extracted image data into a video signal, and outputting the video signal;
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix P ′) for performing a projective conversion process on the image data subjected to the predetermined process with a viewing angle set to a predetermined angle. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, offset matrix O).

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-2th game machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double angle-of-view data including resource image data), and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual A storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which object data or texture data) is stored;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit,
The image processing unit
From image data obtained by performing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data based on information for displaying the image on the display unit, using a specific conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix Pe), the Converted into data of the image displayed by the display unit,
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix P ′) for performing a projective conversion process on the image data subjected to the predetermined process with a viewing angle set to a predetermined angle. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, offset matrix O).

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a 4-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[4-3 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A plurality of image data for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit (for example, double angle-of-view data including resource image data), and information for displaying the image on the display unit (for example, virtual A storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which object data or texture data) is stored;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined image data from the plurality of image data stored in the storage unit, and selects information for displaying the image on the display unit,
The image processing unit
From image data obtained by performing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data based on information for displaying the image on the display unit, using a specific conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix Pe), the Extracting the image data displayed by the display unit;
The specific conversion parameter is a predetermined projection conversion parameter (for example, a projection matrix P ′) for performing a projective conversion process on the image data subjected to the predetermined process with a viewing angle set to a predetermined angle. ) And a predetermined offset parameter (for example, offset matrix O),
The gaming machine characterized in that the size of the image data subjected to the predetermined processing is larger than the size of the image data extracted using the specific conversion parameter.

  According to the first to fourth gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, various effects can be executed with high image quality using the three-dimensional CG technology while suppressing an increase in cost related to CG creation.

[Fifth and sixth game machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a function of reading moving image data into a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) and developing the same and displaying a three-dimensional moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal display has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-1990). No. 155438).

  By the way, in recent years, in gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display, various effects with high image quality using 3D CG (Computer Graphics) technology have become mainstream. And since the CG data for performing the various productions are created in advance and the created CG data is stored in the CGROM, the cost for creating the CG increases year by year. Conventionally, in this technical field, a technique of projecting an image onto an object such as a three-dimensional object (stereoscopic screen) using a projector by a method called a project mapping (texture mapping) method has been proposed. Adjustment for eliminating the deviation of the projected image with respect to the object is the biggest concern.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above second problem, and a second object of the present invention is to suppress an increase in the cost associated with CG creation and to convert an image into a three-dimensional object (using a projector). It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of minimizing a deviation of a projected image with respect to an object when projecting onto an object such as a stereoscopic screen.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[5-1 gaming machine]
A fixed first display unit (for example, a trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, a pseudo reel member 303), and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which one of the images can be displayed;
A control unit (for example, sub control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit, and a plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit ), And a non-volatile storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which virtual object data (for example, virtual object data) corresponding to the form of the display unit to be displayed of the image is stored;
Movable control means (for example, a projection member moving mechanism 305) that controls the second display unit.
And comprising
The controller is
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data Select the data of a predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually transmitted from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) to the predetermined virtual object arranged in a virtual space. First viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected onto the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined virtual object is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the predetermined virtual object data Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The first viewpoint image obtained when the first viewpoint image projected onto the predetermined virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light) on the virtual space. Generating second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data), storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer storing the data of the second viewpoint image to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , Converting the data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) into a video signal, and outputting the video signal;
In the case where the second display unit is movable and controlled by the movable control unit, the data corresponding to the form of the display unit corresponding to the operation state of the second display unit is used as the data of the predetermined virtual object. A gaming machine characterized by using virtual object data.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[5-2 gaming machine]
A fixed first display unit (for example, a trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, a pseudo reel member 303), and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which one of the images can be displayed;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and virtual object data corresponding to the form of the display unit to be displayed of the image (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which virtual object data) is stored;
A movable control means (for example, a projection member moving mechanism 305) for moving and controlling the second display unit;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data Select the data of a predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually transmitted from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) to the predetermined virtual object arranged in a virtual space. First viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected onto the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined virtual object is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the predetermined virtual object data Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The first viewpoint image obtained when the first viewpoint image projected onto the predetermined virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light) on the virtual space. Generating second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data), storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer storing the data of the second viewpoint image to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , Converting the data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) into a video signal, and outputting the video signal;
In the case where the second display unit is movable and controlled by the movable control unit, the data corresponding to the form of the display unit corresponding to the operation state of the second display unit is used as the data of the predetermined virtual object. Using virtual object data,
A gaming machine, wherein a size of the third buffer is the same as a size of the image, and a size of the second buffer is larger than a size of the third buffer.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 5-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[5-3 gaming machine]
A fixed first display unit (for example, a trapezoidal member 302) and a movable second display unit (for example, a pseudo reel member 303), and at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which one of the images can be displayed;
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and virtual object data corresponding to the form of the display unit to be displayed of the image (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which virtual object data) is stored;
A movable control means (for example, a projection member moving mechanism 305) for moving and controlling the second display unit;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data Select the data of a predetermined virtual object corresponding to the form,
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually transmitted from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) to the predetermined virtual object arranged in a virtual space. First viewpoint image data (for example, virtual projection image data) projected onto the predetermined virtual object when projected onto the predetermined virtual object is generated based on the predetermined original image data and the predetermined virtual object data Then, the data of the first viewpoint image is stored in a first buffer (for example, a virtual buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The first viewpoint image obtained when the first viewpoint image projected onto the predetermined virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light) on the virtual space. Generating second viewpoint image data (for example, virtual photographed image data), storing the second viewpoint image data in a second buffer (for example, a frame buffer) of the volatile storage unit,
The image data displayed on the display unit is transferred from the second buffer storing the data of the second viewpoint image to a third buffer (for example, a screen buffer) of the volatile storage unit. , Converting the data stored in the third buffer (for example, PJ-compatible image data) into a video signal, and outputting the video signal;
In the case where the second display unit is movable and controlled by the movable control unit, the data corresponding to the form of the display unit corresponding to the operation state of the second display unit is used as the data of the predetermined virtual object. Using virtual object data,
The first direction is a player's eye direction with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit
The gaming machine, wherein the second direction is an incident direction of the video light with respect to a display surface of the image of the display unit.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 6-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-1 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) that controls the display operation of the image using the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display form configured by the display unit (for example, A non-volatile storage unit (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which composite virtual object data) is stored,
The controller is
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit;
A volatile storage unit (for example, a VRAM 154) used when the image processing unit executes the processing,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the non-volatile storage unit, and the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data Selecting data of the first virtual object corresponding to the display form;
The image processing unit
Using the volatile storage unit, the first virtual object is decomposed into a plurality of second virtual objects corresponding to the display form (for example, virtual objects of each projection member),
Using the volatile storage unit, corresponding to the predetermined original image data from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight) for each second virtual object arranged in the virtual space Data of a first viewpoint image projected onto each second virtual object when a video to be projected is virtually projected (for example, virtual projection image data of each projection target member), the predetermined original image data and Based on the data of each second virtual object, the first viewpoint image generated for each second virtual object is synthesized and virtually projected onto the first virtual object. Generating synthesized image data (for example, synthesized virtual projection image data),
A second image acquired when the composite image projected onto the first virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light) on the virtual space. Generating viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data), storing the data of the second viewpoint image in the volatile storage unit;
A gaming machine, wherein data of the second viewpoint image stored in the volatile storage unit is converted into a video signal and the video signal is output.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 6-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[6-2th game machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display form configured by the display unit (for example, A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which composite virtual object data) is stored;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and the display form of the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data Selecting data of the first virtual object corresponding to
The image processing unit
The first virtual object is decomposed into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of the projection target members) corresponding to the display form, and the second virtual objects arranged in the virtual space are divided into the second virtual objects. On the other hand, a predetermined viewpoint image projected on each second virtual object when a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a predetermined direction (for example, a player's line of sight). Data (for example, virtual projection image data of each projection member) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and data of each second virtual object, and is generated for each second virtual object. Synthesizing the predetermined viewpoint images to generate synthesized image data (for example, synthesized virtual projection image data) virtually projected onto the first virtual object; A gaming machine characterized by

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a 6-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 6-3 gaming machine]
A display unit (for example, various projection members) on which an image is displayed;
A projection unit (for example, a projection block 201 including a projector 213) that projects video light corresponding to the image on the display unit;
A plurality of original image data (for example, resource image data) for generating the image to be displayed on the display unit, and data of a first virtual object corresponding to a display form configured by the display unit (for example, A storage unit (for example, a ROM cartridge substrate 86) in which composite virtual object data) is stored;
A control processing unit (for example, a sub CPU 151) that controls a generation process of the image displayed on the display unit;
An image processing unit (for example, GPU 153) that performs processing related to the output of the image in accordance with control by the control processing unit,
The control processing unit selects predetermined original image data from the plurality of original image data stored in the storage unit, and the display form of the display unit that is a display target of the predetermined original image data Selecting data of the first virtual object corresponding to
The image processing unit
The first virtual object is decomposed into a plurality of second virtual objects (for example, virtual objects of the projection target members) corresponding to the display form, and the second virtual objects arranged in the virtual space are divided into the second virtual objects. On the other hand, when a video corresponding to the predetermined original image data is virtually projected from a first direction (for example, a player's line of sight), the first projected onto each second virtual object. Viewpoint data (for example, virtual projection image data of each projection target member) is generated based on the predetermined original image data and each second virtual object data, and generated for each second virtual object. Combining the first viewpoint image thus generated to generate data of a composite image virtually projected onto the first virtual object (for example, combined virtual projection image data);
A second image acquired when the composite image projected onto the first virtual object is virtually photographed from a second direction (for example, an actual incident direction of video light) on the virtual space. Generate viewpoint image data (for example, virtual captured image data)
The first direction is a player's eye direction with respect to the display surface of the image of the display unit
The gaming machine, wherein the second direction is an incident direction of the video light with respect to a display surface of the image of the display unit.

  According to the fifth and sixth gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, when an increase in cost associated with CG creation is suppressed and an image is projected onto an object such as a three-dimensional object (stereoscopic screen) using a projector. The deviation of the projected image with respect to the object can be suppressed to the minimum.

<Appendix (Summary of Invention of Second Embodiment)>
[7th to 14th game machines]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege given to a player, a game (such as a medal) is paid out, and a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  By the way, a gaming machine including a projector that projects image light toward the front has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2006-187444). In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-187444, the first projection member on which the image light projected from the projector is reflected to the back side of the gaming machine main body, and the reflected image light is projected. A second projection member. Then, image light representing a two-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface of the first projection member, and image light representing a three-dimensional image is projected onto the projection surface of the second projection member. Therefore, it is possible to perform a novel effect that allows the image to feel a three-dimensional effect and depth.

  However, in recent years, by making effective use of the functions unique to gaming machines in which video is projected by the video light projected from the projector, it is possible to produce a higher visual effect than before, There is a demand to enhance interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to suitably enhance interest by performing an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a 7-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7-1th gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a driving mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area are provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction is multifaceted using an outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees. By switching a part of the projection plane on which the video is projected (projection plane portion excluding the lower screen 7082), the video projected on one projection area (for example, the projection plane 7123 of the first screen member 712) and the other An effect can be realized in which both the projected image (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) can be visually recognized, and the interest can be enhanced. . Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. .

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection areas, there are three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). A triangular prism shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has a polygonal column shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, Projection irrelevant projection between one projection area and another projection area when the projection area on which the image is projected is changed from one projection area to another projection area by the image light projected from the projector 213) It may be necessary to go through an area. In this regard, the movable projection member has three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular prism shape, the movable projection member is simply rotated about 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and immediately from one projection area to another projection area without passing through an unrelated projection area. It becomes possible to change to.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a seventh-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[7-2 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, drive mechanism 815 and large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection region, and the movable projection member has a three-dimensional shape of the projection surface onto which the image is projected. It has a plurality of different projection areas in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a 360-degree outer peripheral surface can be formed with a simple configuration by simply rotating a columnar movable projection member movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction. It is possible to switch the projection plane in a multifaceted manner and realize an effect of visually recognizing both an image projected on one projection area and an image projected on another projection area, and can enhance the interest. Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. . In addition, the movable projection member includes a plurality of projection regions (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712 and the second screen member 714) having different three-dimensional (undulation) shapes of the projection surface onto which the image light is projected. Projection surface 7141 and projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716 in the circumferential direction, so that the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can visually recognize any of a plurality of projection areas. High performance can be performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the plurality of projection areas (for example, projection surfaces of the first screen member 712) that the movable projection target (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) have a flat shape (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and a convex shape (for example, a third surface). The projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716), the concave shape (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714), and the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining these have different projection surfaces. .

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is flat (for example, the projection surface of the first screen member 712). 7123), a convex shape (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), a concave shape (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and a three-dimensional shape combining these shapes. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect than never before.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a seventh to third gaming machines having the following configuration.

[7-3 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is arranged in the circumferential direction with a predetermined axis as a rotation axis (for example, the rotation axis 722) in a manner in which any image projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized. Rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be rotated to change the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area, and the movable projection member Has a plurality of projection areas with different three-dimensional shapes on the projection surface on which the image is projected in the circumferential direction, has a predetermined weight, and brings the center of gravity of the movable projection target member closer to the rotation axis. OK Not occupying weight member (e.g., weight member 7326,7366) and having a.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), a simple configuration in which a columnar movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is simply rotated in the circumferential direction is multifaceted using an outer peripheral surface of 360 degrees. By switching the projection plane, it is possible to realize an effect of visually recognizing both the image light projected on one projection area and the image light projected on another projection area. Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a function peculiar to a gaming machine in which an image is projected by projecting image light. . Moreover, the movable projection member surrounds a plurality of projection regions (for example, the drive mechanism 815, the large-diameter gear 742, the stopper mechanism 790, and the gear-shaped portion 744) having different three-dimensional shapes on the projection surface onto which the image light is projected. Since it has in the direction, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect such that the three-dimensional shape of the projection plane can visually recognize all of the plurality of projection areas.

  By the way, when the movable projection member has a plurality of projection regions having different three-dimensional shapes of projection planes onto which image light is projected in the circumferential direction, the center of gravity of the movable projection member and the rotation axis (for example, the rotation axis 722). ) And the rotational balance of the movable projection member may become unbalanced. Therefore, by having a weight member that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the movable projection member and the rotation axis close to each other, there are a plurality of projection regions in the circumferential direction, each having a different three-dimensional shape of the projection surface onto which the image light is projected. However, it is possible to prevent the rotational balance of the movable projection member from becoming unbalanced, and it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher video visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the plurality of projection areas (for example, projection surfaces of the first screen member 712) that the movable projection target (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has in the circumferential direction. 7123, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) are projections having different shapes from among a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a solid shape combining these shapes. It has a surface.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the projection surface on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) is a solid shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a combination of these. Since the shape can be changed to any one of the shapes, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect than ever before. Moreover, even if the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface can be variously changed to any one of a flat shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and a combination of these three shapes, a movable projection member (for example, a movable screen) Since the weight member (for example, weight members 7326 and 7366) that makes it possible to bring the center of gravity of the unit 700) closer to the rotation axis, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an 8-1 game machine having the following configuration.

[Eighteenth gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a driving mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area, and the stopping means has an operating member (for example, a stopper mechanism 790) that can be operated in the vertical direction. The movable projection member has an engagement portion (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744) that can be engaged with the operation member when the operation member is operated in the vertical direction in the circumferential direction at predetermined angles. Formed along Engaging members (e.g., protrusions 7442) which is characterized by having a.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be moved to the desired position with a simple configuration that simply operates the operation member (for example, the stopper mechanism 790) in the vertical direction. Can be stopped. In particular, if the predetermined angle (the angle at which the engaging member (for example, the protrusion 7442) is formed in the circumferential direction) is small, the movable projection target member is projected to an arbitrary position (for example, one projection region). The image is projected by projecting the image light such that the image light is stopped at a position where the image light and the image light projected onto another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized). This makes it possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect by making use of the functions peculiar to the gaming machine, which can enhance the interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection target (for example, the movable screen unit 700) projects an image by the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). As the plurality of projection areas, there are three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). However, it is characterized by a triangular prism shape surrounded by the three projection regions.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for example, when the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) has a polygonal column shape surrounded by four or more projection areas, the projection means (for example, When changing the projection area onto which the image light projected from the projector 213) is projected from one projection area to another projection area, an irrelevant projection area is passed between the one projection area and the other projection area. May need to be done. In this regard, the movable projection member has three projection areas (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). In the case of an enclosed triangular prism shape, the movable projection member is simply rotated about 120 degrees in the forward direction or the reverse direction, and immediately from one projection area to another projection area without passing through an unrelated projection area. It becomes possible to change to.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an eighth-second gaming machine having the following configuration.

[8-2 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area, and the stop means includes a rod-shaped operating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be operated in the vertical direction. And the movable projection member is directed radially outward at every predetermined angle so that the tip of the rod-like actuating member can be engaged when the rod-like actuating member is actuated in the vertical direction. A protruding rib (for example, a projecting portion 7442) has an engaging member (for example, a gear-shaped portion 744) formed along the circumferential direction, and the rod-shaped operating member has a corner portion of the tip portion. It is characterized by chamfering.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the rod-like operating member is simply configured to actuate the rod-like actuating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction, and the rod-like actuating member is configured with the rib (for example, the protrusion 7442) and the rib. The movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position. Moreover, since the rod-like actuating member has a chamfered corner at the tip, the movable projection member has moved in the circumferential direction even if it is caught without being engaged between the ribs. Sometimes the ribs push up the rod-like actuating member to prevent catching.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an eighth-third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[8-3 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes a plurality of projection areas (for example, projection of the first screen member 712). The image is displayed in any one of the projection area 7123, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714, and the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716. Stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the movable projection member so as to be shaded, an image projected on one projection area among the plurality of projection areas, and The movable projection member is rotated in a circumferential direction in a manner in which any of the images projected on another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized, and the projection area is moved from the one projection area to the above-mentioned one projection area. Rotating means (for example, a drive mechanism 815 and a large-diameter gear 742) that can be changed to another projection area, and the stop means includes a rod-shaped operating member (for example, a stopper pin 7944) that can be operated in the vertical direction. And the movable projection member is radially outward at predetermined angles so that the tip of the rod-like actuating member can be engaged when the rod-like actuating member is actuated in the vertical direction. A protruding rib (e.g., protrusion 7442) has an engaging member (e.g., a gear-shaped portion 744) formed along the circumferential direction, and the rib formed on the engaging member is The radially outer portion is formed so as to swell in the circumferential direction as compared with the radially inner portion.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the rod-like operating member is simply configured to actuate the rod-like actuating member (for example, the stopper pin 7944) in the vertical direction, and the rod-like actuating member is configured with the rib (for example, the protrusion 7442) and the rib. The movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) can be stopped at a desired position. Moreover, since the rib formed on the engaging member is formed so that the radially outer portion swells in the circumferential direction compared to the radially inner portion, once engaged between the rib and the rib, The engagement is difficult to disengage and the movable projection member can be prevented from rotating unintentionally.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Ninth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Columnar movable projection member (for example, movable screen unit 700) in the circumferential direction, and movable projection member driving means (for example, capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction) , A drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and position detection means (for example, an optical sensor unit) capable of detecting the position of the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. The movable projection member driving means responds to the fact that the position detection means detects that the movable projection member is at a specific position in the circumferential direction. And a stop means (for example, a stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744) capable of stopping the rotation of the movable projection member at a specified position, and the position detection means has a longitudinal direction extending in the circumferential direction. And a sensor capable of detecting passage of the shielding member, and the shielding member and the sensor rotate relatively with the rotation of the movable projection member. And the stopping means is configured to stop the rotation of the movable projection member in response to the passage of the shielding member being detected by the sensor. The length in the circumferential direction is the length detected by the sensor even if the movable projection member stops rotating after rotating through a predetermined angle after passing through the sensor. And wherein the are.

  According to the above gaming machine (1), the rotation of the movable projection target member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is stopped in response to the passage of the shielding member (for example, the light shielding piece 791) being detected by the sensor. In this case, a predetermined time is required until the movable projection member decelerates and actually stops. In consideration of this predetermined time, the shielding member passes the sensor in the circumferential length. Then, even if the rotation of the movable projection member stops after rotating by a predetermined angle, the length is detected by the sensor. Thereby, for example, if the shielding member is not detected by the sensor when the rotation of the movable projection member is stopped, it can be determined that the positional deviation has occurred. Therefore, for example, even if a trouble such as misalignment occurs, the subsequent processing can be appropriately performed, so that an effect with a higher visual effect can be suitably performed.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a tenth game machine having the following configuration.

[10-1 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. And a movable projection member driving means capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. (E.g., a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (e.g., a first projection area). A projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) and a second projection region adjacent to the first projection region. At least a shadow surface (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712), and a bonding groove (for example, a groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the first projection surface. The prismatic corner is formed by the first projection surface and the second projection surface by bonding the back surface of the second projection surface.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the bonding groove formed on the back surface of the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714 or the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716). By joining the back surface of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712), a prismatic corner is formed by the first projection surface and the second projection surface. Therefore, it is possible to fill a gap between the two portions that may occur at the joint portion between the end portion on the long side of the first projection plane and the end portion on the long side of the second projection plane. Therefore, even if a movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the continuity of the images projected from the projector (for example, the projector 213) Can be suppressed as much as possible, and the discomfort that can be caused by the gap between the long-side end of the first projection surface and the long-side end of the second projection surface is generated. Since it can reduce, the production | presentation with a higher video visual effect can be performed suitably.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a 10-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[No. 10-2 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. A movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a prismatic shape in the circumferential direction, and a movable projection member driving unit capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) that constitutes a first projection region. Projection plane 7123 of one screen member 712) and a second projection plane (for example, projection plane of second screen member 714) constituting a second projection area adjacent to the first projection area. 141 or the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface form the first projection surface forming the prismatic corner. It is characterized by being fixed by the rod-shaped member (for example, arm member 7144) which straddles the back surface side of this and the back surface side of the said 2nd projection surface.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection plane and the second projection plane are the back side of the first projection plane that forms a prismatic corner and the second projection plane. Since it is fixed by a rod-like member (for example, arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the length of the first projection surface It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the two that may occur at the joint between the end on the side and the end on the long side of the second projection surface. Therefore, even if the movable projection target member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the image light projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213) It is possible to suppress the interruption of the continuity of the projected image as much as possible, and between the long side end of the first projection surface and the long side end of the second projection surface. Since the discomfort that can be caused by the gap can be reduced, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the rod-shaped member (for example, the arm member 7144) straddling the back surface side of the first projection surface and the back surface side of the second projection surface is the movable type. A plurality of the projection target members (for example, the movable screen unit 700) are provided along the longitudinal direction, whereby the first projection surface and the second projection surface are fixed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since a plurality of rod-like members (for example, arm members 7144) are provided along the longitudinal direction of the movable projection target (for example, movable screen unit 700), the first projection The generation of the gap can be suppressed even in the middle part where the gap is particularly likely to occur between the surface and the second projection plane.

(3) In the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) forms the prismatic corner of the first projection surface. A joining groove (for example, a groove 7142) is formed on the back surface of the part, and the back surface of the second projection surface is joined to the joining groove.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the back surface of the second projection surface is bonded to the bonding groove (for example, the groove 7142) formed on the back surface of the first projection surface that forms a prismatic corner. Therefore, it is possible to fill a gap between the two sides that may occur at the junction between the long side end of the first projection plane and the long side end of the second projection plane. Therefore, even if a movable projection target member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is positioned at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, a series of images projected from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213) is continuous. Discomfort can be suppressed as much as possible, and discomfort that can be caused by a gap between the long side end of the first projection surface and the long side end of the second projection surface Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher video visual effect.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a tenth and third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[10-3 gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. A movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a prismatic shape in the circumferential direction, and a movable projection member driving unit capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (for example, a first projection surface) that constitutes a first projection region. Projection screen 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection surface (for example, projection surface of the third screen member 716) constituting the second projection region adjacent to the first projection region. 167) and at least one of the first projection surface and the second projection (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) on the back surface side. At least two ribs (for example, female ribs 7164) are formed toward the projection surface side of the projection surface, and at least one rib is formed on the rear surface side of the other projection surface toward the rear surface side of the one projection surface. (For example, a male rib 7145) is formed, and the first projection surface and the second projection surface are formed by one rib formed on the back side of the other projection surface. It fixes in the aspect pinched between the two ribs formed in the back surface side.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection plane (for example, the projection plane 7167 of the third screen member 716). One rib (for example, male rib 7145) formed on the back side of the other projection surface is sandwiched between two ribs (for example, female rib 7164) formed on the back surface side of one projection surface. Therefore, the first projection surface and the second projection surface can be firmly joined, and the occurrence of a gap between them can be suppressed. Therefore, even if a movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the projector 213) Since it is possible to suppress the continuity of the projected image from being interrupted as much as possible, and to reduce discomfort that may be caused by the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface, An effect with a higher visual effect can be suitably performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714). A bonding groove (for example, groove 7143) is formed on the back surface of the portion forming the prismatic corner of the second projection surface (for example, the projection of the third screen member 716). The back surface of the surface 7167) is configured to be bonded.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, a joining groove (for example, formed on the back surface of the first projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) that forms a prismatic corner portion). Since the back surface of the second projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) is joined to the groove 7143), it can occur at the joint portion between the first projection surface and the second projection surface. The gap between the two can be filled. Therefore, even if the movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) is located at a position where the prismatic corner portion can be seen in front view, the projection is further performed from the projection unit (for example, the projector 213). It is possible to prevent the continuity of the image projected by the image light from being interrupted, and to reduce discomfort that may be caused by the gap between the first projection surface and the second projection surface.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Eleventh game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting image light, and a plurality of projection areas in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit. Is provided in the base member, and a prismatic movable projection member (for example, the movable screen unit 700) having a base member (for example, the right base 732) attached to the end in the longitudinal direction. The movable projection member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, a stopper mechanism 790, and a gear shape portion 744) capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction. And the movable projection member includes a first projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) constituting a first projection region. A second projection plane (for example, projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) constituting a second projection area adjacent to the first projection area, and a third projection area adjacent to the second projection area. A plurality of corners having at least a third projection surface (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) constituting the projection region and forming the prism shape between the projection surfaces adjacent to each other. And an attachment defining member for defining an attachment direction of the base member on at least one of the plurality of corners on the back side of the two projection planes forming the one corner. For example, an attachment defining rib 7122) is provided.

  According to the gaming machine (1) above, the base member can be easily attached to the end of the movable projection member. In this way, by improving the assembly work efficiency, it is possible to suitably realize an effect with a high visual effect.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a 12th-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12-1 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light, and a projection area where a video is projected by the video light projected from the projection unit. It has at least a first projection region (for example, a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection region (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection region can be changed. A movable projecting member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) configured and movable projecting member driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and the like) capable of operating the movable projecting member. A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes an image projected on the first projection area and the second projection area. Said movable projection target member in a manner that is visible any of the image projected, characterized in that it is configured to be actuated.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the image light projected on the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (for example, the third screen member). It is possible to realize an effect in which both the image light projected onto the projection surface 7167) of 716 can be visually recognized and the interest can be enhanced. Such an effect with a high visual effect cannot be realized by, for example, a liquid crystal display, but can be realized for the first time by making use of a projector-specific function.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area onto which the image light is projected and the projection in the second projection area onto which the image light is projected The three-dimensional shape of the surface is constituted by different shapes.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are different from each other, the video visual effect is improved. A higher performance can be performed.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a twelfth game machine having the following configuration.

[12th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light, and a projection area where a video is projected by the video light projected from the projection unit. It has at least a first projection region (for example, a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection region (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection region can be changed. A movable projecting member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) configured and movable projecting member driving means (for example, a driving mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and the like) capable of operating the movable projecting member. A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744), and a fixed projection area (for example, a lower screen 7082) on which an image projected from the projection unit is projected. A fixed projection member (e.g., a fixed base 708), and the movable projection member driving means includes the first projection region in a state where the image is projected onto the fixed display region. The projection area can be changed between the second projection area and the second projection area.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the second projection area (with the image projected on the fixed display area). For example, since the projection area can be changed with respect to the projection surface 7167) of the third screen member 716, it is possible to realize an effect with a higher video visual effect and enhance the interest. In particular, when one projection area is formed by the projection area of the movable projection member and the fixed projection area (eg, the lower screen 7082) of the fixed projection member (eg, the fixed base 708). , The visual effect of the image is further enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the three-dimensional shape of a projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) in the first projection area on which the image is projected, and the image The three-dimensional shape of the projection surface (for example, the projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716) in the second projection region on which is projected is configured to be different from each other.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the three-dimensional shape of the projection plane in the first projection area (for example, the projection plane 7141 of the second screen member 714) and the projection plane in the second projection area (for example, the third projection area). Since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface 7167) of the screen member 716 is different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a 12th-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Twelfth-3-3 gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a projection unit (for example, a projector 213) capable of projecting video light, and a projection area where a video is projected by the video light projected from the projection unit. It has at least a first projection region (for example, a projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714) and a second projection region (for example, a projection surface 7167 of the third screen member 716), and the projection region can be changed. Movable projection member material (for example, movable screen unit 700) configured and movable projection member drive means (for example, drive mechanism 815, large-diameter gear 742) capable of operating the movable projection part. , A stopper mechanism 790 and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the movable projection member driving means includes an image projected on the first display area and the second display area. The movable projection member can be operated in a manner in which both of the projected images can be visually recognized, and the movable projection member is at least one of the first projection area and the second projection area. It is characterized in that a shadow area is formed in the projected area.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the shadow area is formed in at least one of the first projection area and the second projection area, it is possible to achieve an effect with a higher video visual effect. , Can enhance the interest. That is, although the image light projected from the projection means can be projected originally, the image light is not projected and a shadow region is formed. As a result, for example, a hidden video that cannot be visually recognized in the shaded area is projected, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the movable projected member is operated so that the hidden video is projected. It can be realized.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, at least one of the projection planes constituting the first projection area and the projection plane constituting the second projection area is the projection It has the convex part which swells to the means side, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the above gaming machine (2), it is possible to produce an effect with a higher video visual effect with a simple configuration having only a convex portion bulging toward the projection means.

  Note that “inflating toward the projection unit” means that when image light is directly projected onto the projection surface by the projection unit such as a projector, the projection unit swells toward the projection unit such as the projector. When the image light projected by the projection means such as a projector is reflected on a reflecting member such as a mirror and then projected on the projection surface, it means that the image light swells toward the reflecting member such as the mirror.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Thirteenth gaming machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of gaming states (for example, a general gaming state) having different advantages for the player. Gaming state control means (for example, main control board 71) and projection means (for example, projector 213) capable of projecting video light according to the result of the lottery. And a movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and operating the movable projection member Movable projection member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, and a gear-shaped portion 744) that can be moved, and the movable projection member is As a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the shadow means, the projection area has at least a first projection area and a second projection area, and is operated by the movable projection member driving means. And a three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area where the image is projected by the image light, and a projection in the second projection area where the image is projected by the image light. The three-dimensional shapes of the surfaces are different from each other, and the movable projection member driving means projects the image light projected from the projection means onto different projection areas according to the gaming state. As described above, the movable projection member is configured to be operable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the projection area on which the image is projected is changed according to the gaming state by the image light projected from the projection means, and it is easy to operate the movable projection member. With this configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection plane with different image visual effects depending on the gaming state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect. Become.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth game machine having the following configuration.

[Thirteenth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a plurality of gaming states (for example, a general gaming state) having different advantages for the player. Gaming state control means (for example, main control board 71) and projection means (for example, projector 213) capable of projecting video light according to the result of the lottery. And a movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having a plurality of projection areas as projection areas on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and operating the movable projection member Movable projection member driving means (for example, a drive mechanism 815, a large diameter gear 742, and a gear-shaped portion 744) that can be moved, and the movable projection member is As a projection area on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the shadow means, the projection area has at least a first projection area and a second projection area, and is operated by the movable projection member driving means. And a three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection area where the image is projected by the image light, and a projection in the second projection area where the image is projected by the image light. The three-dimensional shapes of the surfaces are different from each other, and the movable projection member driving means projects the image light projected from the projection means onto different projection areas according to the gaming state. The movable projection member can be operated as described above, and one projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) of the plurality of projection areas and the one The movable projection target member can be operated so that forward rotation and reverse rotation are repeatedly performed between other projection regions adjacent to the projection region (for example, the projection surface 7141 of the second screen member 714). It is characterized by being configured.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the projection area on which the image is projected is changed according to the gaming state by the image light projected from the projection means, and it is easy to operate the movable projection member. With this configuration, it is possible to project an image on a projection plane with different image visual effects depending on the gaming state. Moreover, since the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the first projection region and the three-dimensional shape of the projection surface in the second projection region are different from each other, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect. Become. Furthermore, the video light projected from the projection means repeatedly forward and reverse rotation between one projection area and another projection area while the image is projected onto different projection areas depending on the gaming state. Since this is possible, it is possible to produce an effect that expects which projection area the image light is projected onto. For example, in a relatively advantageous gaming state, when image light is projected onto one projection area, and in a relatively unfavorable gaming state, image light is projected onto another projection area, one projection area and another projection By repeatedly performing forward rotation and reverse rotation with the region, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a high video visual effect.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[14th game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, an internal lottery means) for performing lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game proceeds according to the result of the lottery, Projection means (for example, projector 213) capable of projecting predetermined image light, and image light control means (for example, sub-control board 72) capable of controlling an image projected by the image light projected from the projection means. ) And a projection area in which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection unit, a first projection area (for example, the projection surface 7123 of the first screen member 712) and a second projection area (for example, A movable projection member (for example, a movable screen unit 700) having at least a projection surface 7141) of the second screen member 714, and image light projected from the projection means. A fixed projection member having a fixed projection area on which an image is projected (for example, a lower screen 7082 of the fixed base 708), and a movable projection member driving means capable of operating the movable projection member ( For example, a drive mechanism 815, a large-diameter gear 742, and a gear-shaped portion 744), and the image light control means includes a first image light according to the lottery result and a first unrelated to the lottery result. 2 video light can be projected, and an image projected by the first video light (for example, effect image) is projected at least on a projection area of the movable projection member, and the first An image (for example, an information image) projected by two image lights is configured to be projected onto at least a projection area of the fixed projection target member. And features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the image projected by the first image light according to the lottery result is projected at least on the projection area of the movable projection target member, and the lottery result has no relation to the lottery result. Since the image projected by the two image lights is projected at least on the projection area of the fixed projection member, the image projected by the second image light is projected on the projection area of the fixed projection member, An image projected by the first image light can be projected onto a projection area of the movable projection target member, and an effect with a high image visual effect can be suitably performed.

  According to the seventh to fourteenth gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to suitably perform an effect with a higher video visual effect.

[15th to 18th game machines]
Conventionally, a game called pachi-slot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols provided on the surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known.

  The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Outputs a signal requesting start.

  The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do.

  The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers on the program (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery process”) is performed, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and a symbol combination (display combination) related to the winning of the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player.

  By the way, there has been proposed a gaming machine that includes a liquid crystal display device that produces an effect according to a lottery result and includes a light guide plate on the front side of the display area of the display device. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-8744).

  The liquid crystal display device of a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8744 has a display area facing a front direction so that a player can see a display area where an effect is performed, and a light guide plate is provided on the front side of the display area. However, in recent years, it has been required to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  In addition, although it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the interest by providing the light guide plate, since a corresponding area is required for the installation space, there is a possibility that problems such as pressure on the installation space of other devices may occur. was there.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to enhance interest by suitably performing an effect with a higher video visual effect.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a 15-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15th Game Machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by incorporating the predetermined light. The light guide plate includes a light incident part (for example, a side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) where the predetermined light is incident, and the light is incident from the light incident part. Display surface portions (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3) that appear, the display surface portions are inclined with respect to a traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portions, and the light guide plate The light incident part is formed so as to be opposed to the light emitting surface part.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921). And is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, so that an image can be seen from a different viewpoint from the conventional one while reducing the installation space. The visual effect can be further enhanced.

  By the way, if the display surface portion (for example, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate is arranged to be inclined leftward and / or rightward with respect to the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), the light emitting surface portion and the light emitting surface portion are guided. There is a possibility that a predetermined angle is formed between the light incident portion (for example, the side surfaces 911A1, 911B3, and 911C3 on the base end side) of the optical plate, and light from the light emitting surface portion may not be sufficiently incident on the light guide plate. Accordingly, the light incident portion of the light guide plate is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion so that the light can be sufficiently incident, and the video visual effect is preferably enhanced.

  Note that “an image appears by taking in predetermined light” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). . For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a 15-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light-emitting plate (for example, a light-emitting surface of the LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted and a light-guide plate (for example, a display surface unit that displays an image by incorporating the predetermined light) (for example, A light guide plate 911) and a reflective surface portion (for example, an inner surface) that is provided in a wall shape and is inclined with respect to a traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is capable of reflecting an image displayed on the light guide plate. The light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion inside the reflection surface portion in a front view. In addition, by being substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, both the image displayed on the display surface portion and the reflected image where the image is reflected on the reflective surface portion are displayed. Visible Cormorant constructed and characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), and Since it is substantially parallel to the direction of travel of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, the image can be viewed from a different viewpoint from the conventional one while saving the installation space, and the video visual effect is further enhanced. Can do.

  In addition, since both the image displayed on the display surface portion and the reflected image in which the image is reflected on the reflection surface portion (for example, the inner wall 914L, 914R) can be visually recognized, the production has a higher visual effect. Can be performed.

  Note that “an image appears by taking in predetermined light” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). . For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a 15-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15-3 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by incorporating the predetermined light. The light guide plate includes a light incident part (for example, a side surface 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) where the predetermined light is incident, and the light is incident from the light incident part. Display surface portions (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) that appear, and emission portions (for example, side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, 911C2 on the opposite base side) that emit light incident from the light incident portion The display surface portion is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. , The injection unit is characterized in that angle formed between the front surface of the display surface is cut such that acute angle.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, 911C3) of the light guide plate with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921). And is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, so that an image can be seen from a different viewpoint from the conventional one while reducing the installation space. The visual effect can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the light guide plate emission portion (for example, the side surfaces 911A2, 911B2, and 911C2 on the opposite base end side) is cut so that the angle formed with the front surface of the display surface portion of the light guide plate is an acute angle. The light emitted from the emitting unit can be made difficult to visually recognize from the player side, and the third party is informed of the state of the gaming machine using the light emitted from the emitting unit. It becomes possible to do. In this way, it is possible to improve the video visual effect more preferably.

  Note that “an image appears by taking in predetermined light” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear in normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). . For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a 16th-1 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[16th game machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) on which the predetermined light is introduced. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light incident portion (for example, a proximal side surface 911A1 and a proximal side surface 911B1), and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to light incident from the light incident portion. And an exit portion for emitting light incident from the light entrance portion (for example, the side surface 911A2 on the opposite base side and the side surface 911B2 on the opposite base side), and the display surface portions thereof are facing each other. These display surfaces are Are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the part, and are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate, A rib having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light incident portion toward the emitting portion between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate (for example, rib 9113A). , 9115A, 9117A, 9119A).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 911A) and the second light guide plate (for example, the second light guide plate 911B) are connected to each other display surface portion ( For example, while the flat surfaces 911A3) are opposed to each other, these display surface portions are inclined with respect to the traveling direction of a predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion (for example, the light emitting surface of the LED 921), and are taken into the light guide plate. Further, they are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize images appearing on the respective light guide plates with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and an effect with a high visual effect can be performed.

  In addition, a rib (for example, ribs 9113A and 9115A) having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light incident portion toward the emission portion between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate. 9117A, 9119A). Therefore, the distance between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is the largest on the light incident portion side and gradually decreases toward the emission portion side. Thereby, on the light incident part side, it is possible to suppress the light incident from the light sources that should be incident on the other light guide plates, and on the emission part side, the light emission part of the first light guide plate and the second light incident part. Since the distance from the light guide plate emitting portion is reduced, it is possible to emit thick light and to increase the appeal to a third party.

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes a third light guide plate (for example, a third light guide plate 911C) on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, and the third guide. The light plate includes a light incident part (for example, a side surface 911C1 on the base end side) into which the predetermined light enters, and a display surface part (for example, a flat surface 911C3) on which the image appears by the light incident from the light incident part. And an emission part (for example, a side surface 911C2 on the opposite base end side) that emits light incident from the light incident part, and the display surface part is a display surface part (for example, a flat surface) of the second light guide plate 911B3) so as to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion and substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. Placed one on top of the other Furthermore, a rib having an inclined surface that is inclined downward from the light incident portion toward the emitting portion between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate ( For example, ribs 9113B, 9115B, 9117B, 9119B) are formed.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911C3) of the third light guide plate is the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911B3) of the second light guide plate. ), And is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. Has been placed. For this reason, light incident from the light source that should be incident on the other light guide plate can be suppressed on the light incident portion side, and the distance from the emission portion of the other light guide plate is reduced on the emission portion side. Therefore, a thicker light can be emitted together with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and the appeal power to a third party can be further increased. In addition, it is possible to view more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image is taken in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to not appearing. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a 16-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[16-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) on which the predetermined light is introduced. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light incident portion (for example, a proximal side surface 911A1 and a proximal side surface 911B1), and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to light incident from the light incident portion. And an exit portion for emitting light incident from the light entrance portion (for example, the side surface 911A2 on the opposite base side and the side surface 911B2 on the opposite base side), and the display surface portions thereof are facing each other. These display surfaces are The first light is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the portion, and is disposed so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light that is taken in. Between the display surface portion of the light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate, a first protrusion having a predetermined length and relatively provided on the light incident side, and the first projection A second protrusion provided shorter than the protrusion and provided on the emission side is provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate are in the traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portions face each other. Are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize images appearing on the respective light guide plates with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and an effect with a high visual effect can be performed. Here, “substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light taken in” means that the display surface portion of the first light guide plate is in the direction of the predetermined light introduced into the first light guide plate. This means that the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the second light guide plate.

  In addition, a first projection having a predetermined length and a second projection shorter than the first projection are provided between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate. It is provided on the injection side. Therefore, the interval between the display surface portion of the first light guide plate and the display surface portion of the second light guide plate is larger on the light incident side than on the emission side. Thereby, in the light-incidence part side, the incident light of the light from the light source which should mutually enter into another light-guide plate can be suppressed. On the other hand, on the emission part side, the distance between the emission part of the first light guide plate and the emission part of the second light guide plate is closer than the light incident part side, so that thick light can be emitted, and a third party can be emitted. It becomes possible to increase the appeal power against.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1), further including a third light guide plate on which an image appears by taking in the predetermined light, wherein the predetermined light is incident on the third light guide plate. A light incident part, a display surface part on which the image appears by light incident from the light incident part, and an emission part that emits light incident from the light incident part. 2 is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while facing the second display surface portion, and is approximately with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the third light guide plate. Further, they are arranged so as to be parallel to each other, and have a predetermined length between the display surface portion of the second light guide plate and the display surface portion of the third light guide plate. Than the third protrusion provided on the writing light side and the third protrusion. Ku and wherein the fourth projection and provided on the exit side.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, also for the third light guide plate, the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portion of the third light guide plate faces the second display surface portion Are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the third light guide plate. For this reason, light incident from the light source that should be incident on the other light guide plate can be suppressed on the light incident portion side, and the distance from the emission portion of the other light guide plate is reduced on the emission portion side. Therefore, a thicker light can be emitted together with the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate, and the appeal power to a third party can be further increased. In addition, it is possible to view more images appearing on each light guide plate with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image is taken in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to not appearing. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the above fourth problem, the present invention provides a 16-3 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[16th-3rd Game Machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention has a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a first light guide plate (for example, a first light guide plate) on which the predetermined light is introduced. 1 light guide plate 911A) and a second light guide plate (for example, second light guide plate 911B), and the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate receive the predetermined light. A light incident portion (for example, a proximal side surface 911A1 and a proximal side surface 911B1), and a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911A3 and a flat surface 911B3) on which the image appears due to light incident from the light incident portion. And an exit portion for emitting light incident from the light entrance portion (for example, the side surface 911A2 on the opposite base side and the side surface 911B2 on the opposite base side), and the display surface portions thereof are facing each other. These display surfaces are Inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the part, and is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the first light guide plate and the second light guide plate are in the traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion while the display surface portions face each other. Are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize images appearing on the respective light guide plates with parallax (displacement) while reducing the installation space, and an effect with a high visual effect can be performed.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in the above (1) and (2) means that the image is taken in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to not appearing. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[17th Game Machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, LED board 922) in which at least a first light source and a second light source are arranged, and the first light source and / or the second light source. And a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911C) having a light incident portion (for example, a side surface 911C1 of the base end portion) that takes in at least light, and an image appears by taking light from the light incident portion. The light incident section includes a first protrusion (for example, a protruding body 956) that receives light from the first light source, and a first protrusion that receives light from the second light source. At least two protrusions (for example, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956), and the gaming machine includes at least the first protrusion and the second protrusion. A partition member (for example, a partition wall 937) for partitioning is provided. To.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, between the first protrusion (for example, the protrusion 956) and the second protrusion (for example, another protrusion 956 adjacent to the protrusion 956). Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from the light sources from entering each other, that is, other light sources from being mixedly incident, so that an effect with a high visual effect can be performed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the light guide plate has a display surface portion (for example, a flat surface 911C3) on which the image is displayed by light incident from the light incident portion, the first light source or / And is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the second light source and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light introduced into the light guide plate. The two protrusions are formed so as to face the first light source and the second light source, respectively.

  When the display surface portion (for example, the flat surface 911C3) of the light guide plate is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source as in the gaming machine of (2) above, the traveling direction of the light from the light source and the guiding direction are guided. There is a possibility that a predetermined angle is generated between the light plate and the end portion of the light plate, and the light from the light source cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, the first protrusion is formed so as to face the first light source, and the second protrusion is formed so as to face the second light source. Thereby, the light emitted from the first light source is efficiently incident on the first protrusion, and the light emitted from the second light source is efficiently incident on the second protrusion. As a result, it is possible to enhance the video visual effect.

  As described in (1) above, “an image appears by taking light from a light incident part” and “an image appears by light incident from a light incident part” described in (2) above. It is not limited to the fact that the image does not appear at normal times (when light is not taken in from the light incident portion). For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by introducing disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when light is input from a light incident portion is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also “ This is called “image”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Furthermore, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and when the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) The traveling direction of light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the device itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a 17-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[17th-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) from which predetermined light is emitted, and a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by incorporating the predetermined light. The light guide plate transmits a light incident part (for example, side surfaces 911A1, 911B1, 911C1 on the base end side) where the predetermined light enters and light incident from the light incident part. Display surface portions (for example, flat surfaces 911A3, 911B3, and 911C3) on which the image appears, and the display surface portions are at least partially impervious to inhibit transmission of light incident from the light incident portions. It has a sex region.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when predetermined light enters from the light incident part of the light guide plate, a non-transparent area is created three-dimensionally and conspicuously raised by the surrounding light transmissive area. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1), the light guide plate is incorporated in the light guide plate while the display surface portion is inclined with respect to a traveling direction of predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. The light incident part is formed so as to face the light emitting surface part and is substantially parallel to the traveling direction of the predetermined light.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the display surface portion of the light guide plate is arranged to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion, the light emitting surface portion and the light incident portion of the light guide plate There is a possibility that a predetermined angle is generated between the light emitting surface portion and the light emitted from the light emitting surface portion cannot sufficiently enter the light guide plate. Therefore, the light incident portion of the light guide plate is formed so as to face the light emitting surface portion, so that light from the light emitting surface portion can efficiently enter the light guide plate. As a result, it is possible to enhance the video visual effect.

  Note that “the image appears by taking in the predetermined light” described in (1) above means that the image is not shown in the normal time (when the predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is not taken in). It is not limited to that. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when predetermined light emitted from the light emitting surface portion is taken in is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, it is indirectly or directly displayed by light emitted from the light emitting surface portion. Things are also called “images”.

  Further, the “light emitting surface portion” described in the above (1) and (2) includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. However, the irradiation direction from the light source arranged on the substrate may be a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb), or the light source itself may be arranged inclined with respect to the substrate. Therefore, a mode in which the display surface portion is inclined with respect to the irradiation direction from the light source is also included.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[18-1 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, an LED substrate 922) on which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A, 928B, 928C), and a light guide plate (for example, light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light emitting member. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts light taken from the light source to the light emitting unit. As for each of the plurality of light emitting units, a conductive unit having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the corresponding light emitting unit (for example, the light guide lens 924). , And having 924B, the 924C).

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side with different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit behind the light guide plate. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect.

  By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the length from the light source to the light emitting unit is different, the light emission intensity in the light emitting unit varies. There is a risk that it will occur. Therefore, the light-emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light-emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting portions, so that the light taken from the light source is conducted to the light-emitting portion. ing. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting units with different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit, the light emission intensity in the light emitting unit is made substantially uniform even though all take in light from the light source arranged on the same light emitting surface part. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “an image appears by taking light from a light source” is not limited to the fact that an image does not appear at normal times (when no light is taken from a light source). For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by ambient light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when light is taken in from a light source is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also “ This is called “image”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Furthermore, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and when the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) The traveling direction of light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the device itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

  In the above (1), the expression for the distance and the dimension is unified with “length”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the dimension of the structure itself (for example, the light emitting unit itself) is defined as “length”. The length between objects may be defined as “distance”.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides an 18-2 gaming machine having the following configuration.

[18-2 gaming machine]

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a light emitting surface portion (for example, a light emitting surface of an LED 921) on which a plurality of light sources are arranged, and a plurality of light emitting portions (for example, a lens 928A) that emits light by taking in light from the light sources. , 928B, 928C), and a light guide plate (for example, light guide plate 911) on which an image appears by taking in light from a light source different from the light emitting member. The plurality of light emitting units are arranged behind the light guide plate so as to have different lengths from the light source, and the light emitting member conducts light taken from the light source to the light emitting unit. As a thing, the conduction | electrical_connection part (for example, light guide lens 9) of the length according to the length from the said light source to the said corresponding light emission part corresponding to each of these light emission parts. 4A, 924B, 924C), and the conductive portion is inclined with respect to the traveling direction of light from the light source and is formed to face the light source. .

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the plurality of light emitting units are arranged side by side with different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit behind the light guide plate. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect with a high visual effect.

  By the way, since each of the plurality of light emitting units takes light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface portion, if the length from the light source to the light emitting unit is different, the light emission intensity in the light emitting unit varies. There is a risk that it will occur. Therefore, the light-emitting member has a conductive portion having a length corresponding to the length from the light source to the light-emitting portion, corresponding to each of the plurality of light-emitting portions, so that the light taken from the light source is conducted to the light-emitting portion. ing. In addition, since the conducting portion is disposed to be inclined with respect to the traveling direction of the light from the light source, a predetermined angle is generated between the traveling direction of the light from the light source and the conducting portion, and the light from the light source is There is a possibility that light cannot enter the conducting part sufficiently. Therefore, the conduction portion is formed so as to face the light source disposed on the light emitting surface portion, so that light from the light source can efficiently enter the conduction portion. As a result, for a plurality of light emitting units having different lengths from the light source to the light emitting unit, all of the light emitting units take in light from the light sources arranged on the same light emitting surface unit, while efficiently incorporating light in the light emitting unit. It is possible to make the light emission intensity substantially uniform, and it is possible to produce an effect with a higher visual effect.

  Note that “an image appears when light is taken from a light source different from the light emitting member” means that no image appears during normal times (when light is not taken from a light source different from the light emitting member). It is not limited. For example, even in normal times, for example, an image can be visually recognized by introducing disturbance light, and a mode in which a clearer image appears when light is taken from a light source different from the light emitting member is also included. In addition, an aspect in which an image is formed by a transparent paint, a transparent member, or the like and is generally invisible, but can be visually recognized by taking in predetermined light is also included.

  The “image” generally means an image displayed by a projector or a liquid crystal display, but in the present invention, an image displayed indirectly or directly by light from a light source is also “ This is called “image”.

  In addition, the “light emitting surface portion” includes, for example, a single LED. Furthermore, a substrate (for example, LED substrate 922) on which a light source (for example, LED 921) is disposed is also included in the “light emitting surface portion”. Furthermore, the traveling direction of the light from the light source arranged on the substrate is not limited to the case where the light source is substantially orthogonal to the substrate, and when the light source is a spherical surface (for example, when the light source is a light bulb) The traveling direction of light from the light source may be inclined with respect to the substrate, as in the case where the device itself is inclined with respect to the substrate.

  According to the fifteenth to eighteenth game machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by suitably performing an effect with a higher video visual effect.

71 Main Control Board 72 Sub Control Board 213 Projector 700 Movable Screen Unit 708 Fixed Base 712 First Screen Member 714 Second Screen Member 716 Third Screen Member 722 Rotating Shaft 732 Right Base 742 Large Diameter Gear 744 Gear Shape 790 Stopper mechanism 791 Light shielding piece 815 Drive mechanism 911 Light guide plate 912R Right lens subunit 914L, 914R Inner wall 922 LED substrate 924A, 924B, 924C Light guide lens 928A, 928B, 928C Lens 937 Partition wall 956 Projection body 7082 Lower screen 7122 Definition ribs 7123, 7141, 7167 Projection surface 7144 Arm member 7145 Male rib 7164 Female rib 7326 Weight member

Claims (2)

Projection means capable of projecting image light;
A columnar movable projection target member having a plurality of projection areas in which the image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means in the circumferential direction;
A movable projection member driving means capable of rotating and stopping the movable projection member in the circumferential direction;
With
The movable projection member driving means includes:
Stop means capable of stopping the movable projection member so that an image is projected onto any one of the plurality of projection areas;
The movable projection member is circulated around the movable projection member in such a manner that both an image projected onto one projection area and an image projected onto another projection area adjacent to the one projection area can be visually recognized. Rotating means capable of changing the projection area from the one projection area to the other projection area by rotating in the direction. The movable projection member is:
The plurality of projection areas as a plurality of projection areas onto which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means has a triangular prism shape surrounded by the three projection areas. The gaming machine described in 1.